JP6725585B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a first mechanism body (for example, a game board or a front door) and a second mechanism body (for example, a game frame or a case) to which the first mechanism body is attachable/detachable are provided. There is a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like provided with control means (for example, effect control means) capable of controlling the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, the control means provided on the gaming board (first mechanism) has detected an abnormal state of a movable body operably provided on the game frame (second mechanism). There has been a device capable of performing a predetermined abnormality notification based on the above (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-67424, A

In the game machine of Patent Document 1, when a game board that does not correspond to a game frame having a movable body (for example, a game board that corresponds to a specific game frame of a different type) is attached, the control means causes an abnormality of the movable body. There is a problem in that the output of the drive signal to the motor or the like without being recognizable may cause a malfunction such as ignition of the motor or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the occurrence of a problem caused by being mounted on the specific second mechanism body.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention,
A first mechanism body (for example, game board 2/variable display unit) and a second mechanism body (for example, a game frame/main body portion including an opening/closing frame 50 and a game machine frame 3) to which the first mechanism body is attachable/detachable A gaming machine provided with (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A, 1B/slot machine),
The first mechanism has control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the first mechanism and the second mechanism, and a plurality of types of second mechanism including a specific second mechanism ( For example, it can be attached to and detached from a special frame and a common frame,
The second mechanism body detects a plurality of detecting means for detecting the state of the second mechanism body (for example, the game frame can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame). Stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc. ) , an operable movable body, a drive means for driving the movable body, and a plurality of detection means for detecting the states of the operation means and the movable body, and the detection states of the respective detection means. It is possible to output identifiable detection identification information to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame generates serial data that can identify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131, and effects control It is possible to output to the substrate 12.),
The control means is capable of controlling the drive of the movable body by the drive means, and based on the detection specific information output from the second mechanism, the specific first unit to which the first mechanism is mounted is attached. It is determined whether or not it is a two-mechanism body, and when it is determined that it is the specific second mechanism body, a notification is given (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, S61 to S65, S68 of the third initialization process of S51B). In S71, S80 to S83, and S87, the type of game frame is determined based on the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130, and in S67, S73, and S86, any of the notifications A to C is performed based on the determination result. ),
further,
It is a gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can win and a second state in which a game medium cannot win or is difficult. Variable winning means (eg, variable winning ball device 9015 or special variable winning ball device 9022),
It is a state different from the advantageous state, and the special state control means (for example, in the gaming control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) that includes the variable winning means changing to the first state Portion for executing steps S90358 to S90360),
Special state control means (eg, step in game control microcomputer 90560) capable of controlling to a special state (eg, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is controlled to a special state more frequently than the normal state S902208A, S902221A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B) , and
The variable winning means is provided so as not to win the game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to a special state (for example, as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, It is realized by providing the group 9055 and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds),
A variable display that does not trigger to be controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is changed to a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, second variation pattern #25, #27 of shortened variation). Execution is possible with a second variable display pattern (for example, a second variation pattern #26, #28 including a continuous effect) in which the display period is a second period longer than the first period.
In the special state, the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern is lower than the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the first variable display pattern. (For example, in the case of a small hit, the proportion determined by the second variation pattern #28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 93).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect caused by being attached to the specific second mechanism body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the interest from being deteriorated and to enhance the effect of production.

A gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The control means determines whether or not it is the specific second mechanical body based on a specific signal output from the second mechanical body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the third initialization processing in S51B to be performed). In S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, S87, serial data of a specific port number (for example, 4(D), 5(C), 1(g), 2(f)) is specified, (A part that determines whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be appropriately determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The control means determines whether or not the specific second mechanical body is the specific second mechanical body based on the input time of a specific signal output from the second mechanical body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the third step of S51B). In the initialization processing, a portion that determines whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be appropriately determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The control means determines whether or not it is the specific second mechanical body based on a plurality of specific signals output from the second mechanical body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the third initial stage of S51B). In S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the conversion processing, serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) And a frame for determining whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be appropriately determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The second mechanism (for example, a game frame including the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3) is
Including operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.),
Detection specifying information that can specify the detection state of the detection means for detecting the operation of the operation means can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 causes the stick controller 31A or the push button to the input port 131). (A part that can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal from 31B and output it to the production control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The second mechanism (for example, a game frame including the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3) is
Including a movable movable body (for example, a rocket 45 of a special frame, a cover body 48, a stick controller 31A, etc.),
It is possible to output drive specifying information capable of specifying the drive state of the movable body to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 causes the vibration motor 35C to the input port 131, the rocket motor 37C, the cover body motor 39C, the stick motor). A portion that can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the drive signal from 35D and output the serial data to the production control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality.

A gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The control unit (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) is a notification unit (for example, the effect display devices 5 and 5A, the effect LED 9) that is commonly provided by a plurality of types of second mechanism bodies (for example, a dedicated frame and a common frame). Etc.) is used for notification.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately notify any type of the second mechanism.

A gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The game can be executed even if the control means informs,
The use of the detection target object that is the subject of the notification is restricted (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the game while leaving the movable body in which the error information is stored in the third initialization process of S51B in the dead end state). The part that makes it possible.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of abnormality.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following means 9 to 13. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a special state (for example, a high base state) that is frequently controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) as compared to a normal state, as disclosed in JP-A-2016-5513. ) Is known to control gaming machines. In this gaming machine, even if the game medium is launched after being informed that it will be controlled to the special state (for example, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed), the variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device) ) It is possible to configure so as not to win the prize. However, when variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is possible that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable state is controlled to the special state after the variable display having the long variable display period is executed, the game medium cannot be won in the variable winning means, and the effect is enhanced. Instead of being unable to do so, there is a risk that the interest will be diminished. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in interest.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), in which a gaming medium can be won. The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed to one state and the second state where the game medium cannot win or is difficult is a state different from the advantageous state, Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) including the variable winning means changing to the first state (for example, a portion for executing steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) ), and special state control means (for example, a game control micro that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is controlled more frequently than the normal state to the special state. And a portion for executing steps S902208A, S902221A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the computer 90560), and the variable winning means is notified to the variable winning means after being notified that the special state is controlled. It is provided so that the game medium shot toward the player cannot win the prize (for example, a nail group 9055 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is 0. The variable display that is realized by setting it to 8 seconds) and does not trigger the advantageous state control in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the first variable display pattern). 2 variation patterns #25, #27) and a second variable display pattern in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, second variation patterns #26, #28 including continuous effects). In the special state, the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern is the special state after the variable display is performed by the first variable display pattern. Is lower than the rate controlled by the second variation pattern #28 (for example, in the case of a small hit, the rate determined by the second variation pattern #28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 93). And
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered and to enhance the effect of production.

(Means 10) In the above (Means 9), a promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the ejection of the game medium to the predetermined route when the special state is controlled ( For example, the effect display device 909 is realized by displaying a character display of "right hitting", an arrow display indicating the right direction, and the like), and the promotion notification unit executes variable display according to the first variable display pattern. It may be configured such that the promotion notification can be executed in different modes between when the variable display is being performed and when the variable display is being performed by the second variable display pattern (for example, in the KT state, a relatively variable time period is used). When the variable display is performed by the long variation pattern (that is, the second variation patterns #26, #28), the variation display is performed by the shortened variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern #25, #27). The character display of "right-handed", the arrow display indicating the right direction, etc. may be reduced or made transparent so that it is not actively encouraged to right-handed. ..
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

(Means 11) In the gaming machine of (Means 9) or (Means 10), the storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, the hitting ball supply tray 903 or the surplus ball receiving tray 904) and the storage means in a full state A full tank notification means capable of executing a full tank notification indicating that there is a notification (for example, it is realized by displaying a character “full tank error” on the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound). The full tank notification means may be capable of changing the execution mode of the full tank notification depending on whether it is controlled to the advantageous state or the special state. (For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a conservative manner (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) compared to the big hit game state. In the big hit game state, when the storage amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the storage amount exceeds the second predetermined amount which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is performed. May be performed.).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

(Means 12) In the gaming machine of (Means 9) to (Means 11), the special state is controlled again in the special state based on the execution of the next variable display after the special state is controlled. At this time, special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a continuous small hit effect) (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90200 that executes steps S90933 and S90944 in accordance with the process table selected in step S90928). May be provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 13) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (Means 9) to (Means 12), a count display is performed based on a predetermined trigger (for example, that a game ball has won a special winning opening or a special winning opening 9024). For example, a counting display executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90200 executing step S90707) capable of updating and displaying the number of prize balls is provided, and the counting display executing means displays the updated counting result. The counting display is updated by the first pattern in which the period up to is the first specific period and the second pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is longer than the first specific period is the second specific period. It is possible to display (for example, when displaying the number of prize balls 90300 in the big hit pattern, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the second KT pattern is displayed. When displaying the number of prize balls 90305, the number of prize balls may be increased by one at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds).
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of patterns for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the count display is updated and displayed.

Incidentally, the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. You may have it.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine 1A as an example of the present invention from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which a gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. 1 is opened. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine 1B as an example of the present invention from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which a gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. 4 is opened. It is explanatory drawing which compares the kind of operation means and movable body mounted in a special frame and a common frame. It is a block diagram showing a wiring connection state between the detection means on the game frame side and the effect control board. FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship with various electronic components connected to each input port of the serial conversion IC of the dedicated frame and FIG. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the control contents of production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the control contents of the 2nd initialization processing which CPU for production control executes. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the control contents of the 2nd initialization processing which CPU for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection time operation control, detection time operation control, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the control contents of the 3rd initialization processing which the production control CPU executes. (A)-(F) is a figure which shows an example of the notification which CPU for production|presentation control performs in a 3rd initialization process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. (A)-(F) is a figure showing an example of the production mode as the modification 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of control contents of the 3rd initialization processing as modification 2 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the control contents of production control main processing as the modification 3 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the principal part of the game frame and game board as the modification 4 of this invention. (A) is a front view showing the window unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the window unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a state of the window unit seen from diagonally front, and (B) is a perspective view showing a state of the window unit seen from diagonally rear. It is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the configuration of the window unit seen obliquely from the front. It is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the configuration of the window unit viewed from diagonally behind. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a tubular portion. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the open/close frame and the gaming machine frame. It is a perspective view showing a state where the movable body unit in the operation standby mode is seen from diagonally front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of 1st operation form from diagonally front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of 2nd operation form from diagonally front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of an operation standby form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of an operation standby form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation mode from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation mode from the side. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation of each movable body and LED for production in movable body production. (A) is a schematic view of the light emitting modes of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from the side, and (B) is a schematic view of the light emitting modes of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from above. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a standby state of the effect display device in a normal state, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and (C) is a second operation state of the effect display device. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram showing the state where the opening and closing frame was opened in the second operation mode of the movable body unit. It is the figure which shows one example of the main production control command which is transmitted setting with special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an example of processing contents performed in command analysis processing. (A) is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing, and (B) is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in S57. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a movable body effect setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of determining a movable body effect in the case of super reach A. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A)-(F) is an explanatory view showing an example of the flow of compound production. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a two-step operation of the first movable body of Modification 5. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a movable body effect in the case of the modification 5, another example 1, and another example 2. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of various alerts, (B), (C) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a movable body effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the movable body production|presentation at the time of reach advance notice and a stir production. It is explanatory drawing which shows that it moves along the circular path of the 1st movable body of the modification 6A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rocking|swiveling operation of the 1st movable body of the modification 6B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the multiple position stop of the 1st movable body of the modified example 6C. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 6D, (B) is a diagram for explaining the guide hole of the partition plate and the like. FIG. 13 is a transverse cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 7. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window unit of the modification 8. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a fixed type ball passage according to a modified example 9, and (B) and (C) are vertical cross-sectional views showing a movable type ball passage according to a modified example 9. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 10, (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit as another example, (D) ) Is a side view of (C). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd transparent body and the game machine frame of the modification 11. FIG. 13A is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 12, and FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 13. (A) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a tubular body of a modified example 14, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which a light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 14 is changed stepwise. (A) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a tubular body of a modified example 15, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which a light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 15 is different stepwise. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of the modified example 16, (B) is a front view showing a production mode of the light guide plate production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the 1st movable body of a modification 17, and a 2nd movable body. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the movable body production execution processing of the modification 18. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the 1st movable body of a modification 18, and a 2nd movable body. (A) (B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification 19. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state where the window unit of Modification 20 is located at the first visual recognition position, and (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state where the window unit is moved to the second visual recognition position. The flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 20, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frame action effect in the case of super reach B, (C) is the determination of the movable body effect in the case of super reach B. It is a figure which shows an example. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of the modification 21 from the front. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the operation example of the frame side movable body of the modification 21. The flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 21, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frame side movable body effect in the case of super reach B, (C) is the case of the 2nd operation pattern PTB-2. It is a diagram showing an example of determining the frame-side movable body effect. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the deformation|transformation operation|movement of the 1st movable body of the modified example 22, (B) is a front view which shows the magnitude relationship of the 1st movable body and the hole part of a 2nd transparent body which are shown to (A). Is. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a deforming operation of the first movable body of Modification 23. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of a special variable winning ball device included in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine in a closed state. It is a perspective view of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine in an open state. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a performance control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination rate of the variation pattern of a special design and a decorative design. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a process during the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol process process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing which the production control microcomputer executes. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows background design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation continuous production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows background pattern variation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the consecutive small hit production decision table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during background design change. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation stop process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship of the content of pending|holding storage, and the limit of KT notification and small hit notification. It is a flow chart which shows reservation continuous production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of a continuous small hit production. It is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect.

Modes for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1A, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is viewed from the front side. It will be described as a reference. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the present embodiment is a facing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1A (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly classified into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) having a gaming board surface on the front side, and a gaming machine frame for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. 3 (underframe). The game board 2 is attachable to and detachable from the game machine frame 3, and the game board 2 has a game area (also referred to as a "game section") 10 that is substantially circular in a front view and is surrounded by a guide rail 2b. Has been formed. This game area 10 is an area in which a game ball as a game medium is shot from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and driven in, and the driven game ball can flow down.

Further, an opening/closing frame 50 provided with a window 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10 is rotatably provided around the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by the opening/closing frame 50. It can be opened and closed, and when the opening and closing frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the window 51. In addition, the opening and closing frame 50 is formed in a size capable of covering the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, and below the window 51, a player or the like may shoot a game ball toward the game area. A hit ball operation handle 30 (operation knob) to be operated is provided.

On the front surface of the ball hitting operation handle 30, a rocket 45 as a movable body that is movable in the front-rear direction between an origin position and a projecting position projecting forward from the origin position is provided. It can be driven back and forth by a rocket motor 37C provided inside. Further, inside the hit ball operation handle 30, the rocket origin position sensor 37A that detects that the rocket 45 is at the origin position and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12, and that the rocket 45 is at the projecting position is detected. The rocket projecting position sensor 37B that outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided.

The game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material (transmissive member) having a light-transmitting property such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an obstacle nail (not shown) is formed on the front surface of the game board. ) And guide rails 2b (see FIG. 3), etc., and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back side of the board face plate. .. The game board 2 of the present embodiment is made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property, but the invention is not limited to this, and a non-light-transmitting member such as a plywood plate has a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. It may be configured.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the lower right position of the game area 10 in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each a special symbol that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each in a special symbol game that is an example of a variable display game ( A "special map") is variably displayed (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). The variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is to change (display variably) a plurality of types of special symbols by update display or the like (the same applies to other variable displays). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (displayed) as a display result (variable display result). In the following, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". .. The special figure game of the first special figure is also called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game of the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game".

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2, effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are provided. The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and form a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5A, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. (For example, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game), for example, the left "," "middle," "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C which are a plurality of variable display parts such as three. , 5R, effect symbols (decorative symbols), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). The variable display of the effect symbols is also included in the variable display game.

Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, the special drawing game using the first special drawing on the first special symbol display device 4A, or the special special game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of distinguishable effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a final effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, movable bodies (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and fourth movable body 600L, which will be described later) are displayed. 600R) is provided with a specific game information display area 5Z for displaying specific game information (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) regarding a game regardless of the position. ing. The small symbols include a first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure game and smaller than the effect symbol, and a second small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game and smaller than the effect symbol. included. The small symbol may be always displayed or only displayed for a predetermined period. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not it is currently in a variable display (variable display). The right hit display is a display that prompts the player to operate the hit ball operation handle so that the game ball is shot to the right of 10 in the game area. In this embodiment, a part of the display area of the effect display device 5A is the specific game information display area 5Z, but the specific game information display area 5Z is provided in at least one of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. May be. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a specific game information display device (eg, LED, lamp, 7-segment LED, liquid crystal display device, etc.).

The effect display devices 5X and 5Y have a width of the display screen that is substantially half that of the effect display device 5A, and are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A so as to be movable and rotatable as described later. In the present embodiment, mainly effect display device 5A in the center performs variable display of effect symbols and various effects, and effect display devices 5X and 5Y perform effects related to effect display device 5A. However, in place of the effect display device 5A, variable display of effect symbols may be performed, or effect different from the effect display device 5A may be performed.

Further, these effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through an opening 2c formed in the game board 2. In the present embodiment, part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be visually recognized through the board 200. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

A first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right below the display areas of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y. In the first pending storage display area 5D and the second pending storage display area 5U, a pending storage display is displayed that allows the number of pending storages of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure pending storage number) to be specified. That is, in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold display image corresponding to the special figure game whose execution is held is displayed.

Here, in order to suspend the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is generated based on the winning prize for starting by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. If the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

At the right side positions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there are a first reserved display device 25A and a second reserved display device 25B for displaying the number of special symbol reserved memories in an identifiable manner. It is provided. The first pending display device 25A displays the first special figure pending storage number in a identifiable manner, and the second pending display device 25B displays the second special figure pending storage number in a identifiable manner. For example, each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold storage number) is determined by the number of LEDs that are turned on. ) And the second special figure reservation storage number (the second special figure game reservation storage number) are displayed.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the effect display device 5A, and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is provided below the effect display device 5Y. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state, which is a projecting position that projects into the game area 10, and an open state, which is a retracted position that is retracted from the game area 10, by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. An ordinary electric accessory having a movable plate that changes is provided, and a second starting winning opening as a starting area (second starting area) is formed.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed through (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as the prize balls, and the first special figure. If the number of reserved storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first start condition is satisfied. In addition, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed through (entered) the second start winning port are detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second If the number of special figure reservation storages is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second starting condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a special winning opening as a specific area which changes between an open state and a closed state by a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 shown in FIG. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area is in an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and the player cannot pass (enter) (or is hard to pass (entry)) the player. It changes into a closed state which is disadvantageous to.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the special winning opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

The normal symbol display device 20 is provided at the right side position of the second hold display device 25B. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol (general symbol, normal symbol) that is a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display of ordinary patterns is also called a regular figure game (ordinary figure game). The ordinary figure game is executed based on that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passage of the game ball is detected. At the right side position of the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol reservation display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41. In other words, the public figure hold display 25C displays the number of stored public figure reservations, which is the number of the general figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, on the game board 2, light emitting components on the game area side are arranged. As the game area side light emitting component, for example, a light emitting component (LED) (not shown) provided in the center decorative frame 52, a light emitting component (LED (not shown) provided in the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B) )and so on. In addition, the game board 2 may include a light emitting component (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface (for example, a light guide area) to emit light. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a production effect LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area 10, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are supplied to a hitting ball launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (also referred to as a ball hitting plate) that holds (stores) as much as possible is provided. At a lower portion of the gaming machine frame 3, a discharge port (not shown) for discharging a surplus ball, a foul ball, or the like, which is slightly left from the upper plate 90, to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided. A push button 31B is provided on a member forming the upper plate. A button sensor 36A that detects a player's operation (for example, pressing) on the push button 31B and outputs an operation detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided inside the body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B. There is. A cross button 46 is provided on the member forming the upper plate 90. Inside the main body of the upper plate 90 at the installation position of the cross button 46, a player's operation on the cross button 46 (for example, pressing down, up, left, right) is detected, and an operation detection signal is output. The cross button sensors 38A to 38D for outputting to are provided.

At a lower portion of the gaming machine frame 3, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick origin position sensor 35A that detects that the operation stick is at the origin position and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 inside the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 below the stick controller 31A, and the operation stick. There is provided a stick pull position sensor 35B which detects that it is in the pull position and outputs an operation detection signal to the effect control board 12. Further, inside the stick controller 31A, a vibration motor 35C capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A is provided.

On the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a movable body that can be rotated between an origin position that hides the skylight emitting portion 47 invisible to the player and an open position that opens the effector portion so that the player can see it. The cover body 48 is provided, and can be opened/closed by a cover body motor 39C provided inside. Further, inside the gaming machine frame 3, the cover body origin position sensor 39A that detects that the cover body 48 is at the origin position and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12, and the cover body 48 are at the open position. A cover body open position sensor 39B that detects the presence and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided.

Further, on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a light emitting portion including a plurality of effect LEDs 9 is provided in a strip shape extending downward from the left and right sides of the sky light emitting portion 47 along the left and right side edges of the window portion 51. ing.

Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1A includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, and various kinds of information transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as shown in FIG. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying control signals, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, and an interface board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. Further, on the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc. are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is provided with detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, which detect the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41. The wiring to transmit is connected. In addition, the display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general figure hold display 25C, etc. The wiring for transmitting the command signal for is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The production control command includes, for example, a variation pattern designating command that indicates a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-relation.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work area. A RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides a CPU, a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and a random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. 104 and I/O 105 (Input/Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as fluctuation patterns and various determination tables) is used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program. The I/O 105 has an input port for inputting various signals and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the switch enters is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit. The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, and receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to display an effect. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, the speakers 8L, 8R and the production LED 9 are mounted.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area of the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. A display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 120. , I/O 125 are mounted. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to realize the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of effect). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for effect control patterns and data such as various determination tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

In addition, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the open/close frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 that configure the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game frame, the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program. The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 includes an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound designated by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12. The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on/off the production LED 9 (turning on/off according to the drive content indicated by the illumination signal) based on the illumination signal from the production control board 12.

The effect display device 5A includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5A via the I/O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. Further, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are configured similar to the effect display device 5A with respect to the display configuration, although there are differences in size from the effect display device 5A and movements as will be described later.

In the effect design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5A and the effect design display areas of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, the effect symbols change corresponding to the start of the first or second special figure game. The display starts. When the variable display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first and second special drawing games, the fixed effect symbol (of the three effect symbols of the three effect symbols) becomes the display result (variable display result) of the variable display of the effect symbol. The combination) is stopped and displayed (derived display).

Further, on the effect control board 12, a setting changeover switch 55 for performing effect setting such as volume and light amount, a first drive mechanism 310 of the first movable body 300, a second drive mechanism 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a third drive mechanism 330. 4 drive mechanism 340, 5th drive mechanism 410 of 2nd movable body 400, 6th drive mechanism 510L and 510R of 3rd movable body 500L and 500R, 7th drive mechanism 610L and 610R of 4th movable body 600L and 600R game. Board side electronic components provided on the board 2 side, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pulling position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button Frame side electronic components provided on the game frame side such as the sensors 38A to 38D, the cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body open position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C are connected.

Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine frame 3 is supported by an outer frame 60 formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by an upper plate 61, a lower plate 62, a left side plate 63, and a right side plate 64. Specifically, the lower opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the curtain plate 65, and the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the outer frame 60 are provided at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the gaming machine frame 3 in the vertical direction. A bearing portion (not shown) that rotatably supports a rotating shaft (not shown) that faces is provided, and the gaming machine frame 3 has the outer frame 60 centered around the left side of the outer frame 60. It is rotatably supported between a closed position that closes the opening and an open position that opens the opening.

In the gaming machine frame 3, a mounting portion 160 having an opening having a size into which a back cover 70 that covers various components and devices provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 can be inserted is formed. A locking recess (not shown) is provided at the upper left position, and a board holding metal (not shown) is provided at the upper right position. Therefore, the back cover 70 on the back of the game board 2 is inserted into the mounting portion 160 from the front of the game machine frame 3, and the right end portion is inserted with the left end portion of the game board 2 inserted into the locking recess (not shown). The game board 2 can be mounted on the game machine frame 3 by being locked by a board pressing metal fitting (not shown). Also, the game board 2 can be easily removed from the game machine frame 3 by releasing the locked state of the board pressing metal fitting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, in the lower portion of the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3, various electronic devices such as sensors and motors provided in the gaming frame including the gaming machine frame 3 and the opening/closing frame 50. A frame side connector WCN to which wiring from parts is connected is provided, and a board side connector BCN to which wiring from various electronic parts such as sensors and motors provided on the game board 2 is connected to the lower part of the game board 2. Is provided, and the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN are connected by mounting the game board 2 to the mounting portion 160 from the front. As a result, by mounting the game board 2 on the mounting section 160, the board-side electronic components of the electronic components controlled by the performance control board 12 are connected to the performance control board 12, respectively, and the game board 2 is mounted on the mounting section 160. By removing it, the connection between the board-side electronic components of the electronic components controlled by the performance control board 12 and the performance control board 12 is released.

Next, FIGS. 4 to 7 show another pachinko gaming machine 1B. In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the gaming frame including the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 has a design and accessory unique to a specific model, and is manufactured as a dedicated frame used only in the specific model. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the gaming frame including the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 has a predetermined design and accessory, and is commonly used by a plurality of models. It was manufactured as a frame.

As shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 6, since the pachinko gaming machine 1B is configured substantially the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1A with respect to the basic structure and circuit configuration of the gaming machine, it is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Detailed description will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to functional components and electronic components.

As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B are a gaming machine frame 3 having an opening/closing frame 50 rotatably supported by an outer frame 60, and a gaming machine frame 3 respectively. The game board 2 is detachably attached to the mounting portion 160 of the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are attached to the back side of the game board 2, but the opening/closing frame 50 has a different front design. ..

On the game board 2 of each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, a game area 10 in which a prize unique to the model (for example, various winning holes, etc.) is provided is formed, and a movable movable body and decoration unique to the model are formed. While the members and the like are provided, the outer shape and the like of the board face plate are formed in substantially the same manner. Therefore, the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. It can be mounted on any of the mounting portions 160 of. Further, the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN described above are similarly provided in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game frame of each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is provided with operating means such as a ball hitting handle 30, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and a cross button 46, which can be operated by the player. .. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a cover body 48 capable of opening and closing the sky light emitting portion 47. Although the hitting ball operation handle 30, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, and the like are operation means having the same function and used for the same purpose, as shown in FIG. Etc. are different.

More specifically, the hit ball operation handle 30 can be rotated by a launching device to launch a game ball into the game area 10. The ball hitting operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a rocket 45 that is a movable body that can move between the origin position and the protruding position. Not provided.

The stick controller 31A is movable between an origin position (non-operation position) and a pull position (operation position) on the front side of the origin position, and is detected by the stick origin position sensor 35A at the origin position. Is detected by the stick pull position sensor 35B and vibrated by the vibration motor 35C. On the other hand, the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A does not move up and down, but the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1B moves up and down by the stick motor 35D. Further, the design of the stick controller 31A is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

The push button 31B is movable between an origin position (non-operation position) and an operation position (operation position) below the origin position, and is detected by the button sensor 36A at the operation position. There is. Further, the design of the push button 31B is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

The cross button 46 can be pressed downward at any of the origin position (non-operation position) and the front side, rear side, left side, or right side of the origin position, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D at each operation position. Are detected by the. The pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B have the same design of the cross button 46.

The cover body 48 is rotatable between an origin position and an open position, and is detected by the cover body origin position sensor 39A at the origin position, detected by the cover body open position sensor 39B at the open position, and the cover body motor 39C. With this, the cover body 48 can be rotated. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1B is not provided with the ceiling light emitting portion 47 and the cover body 48 capable of opening and closing the ceiling light emitting portion 47.

Further, the dedicated frame (pachinko gaming machine 1A) does not have a stick motor for vertically moving the stick controller 31A, but the common frame (pachinko gaming machine 1B) has a stick motor 35D for vertically moving the stick controller 31A. .. Further, the dedicated frame (pachinko gaming machine 1A) has a rocket motor 37C for operating the rocket 45 as a movable body for performance, and a cover body motor 39C for operating the cover body 48, but they are common. The frame has no rocket motor or cover motor.

Incidentally, on the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, as shown in FIG. 5, a setting changeover switch 55 for effect setting such as volume and light amount, a first drive mechanism 701 of the movable body 700, and a second drive. Board side electronic components such as the mechanism 702 provided on the game board 2 side and the game frame side such as the stick origin position sensor 35A, the stick pull position sensor 35B, the vibration motor 35C, the stick motor 35D, the button sensor 36A, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D. To the frame side electronic component provided in the.

In addition, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the open/close frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 that configure the pachinko gaming machine 1B. The operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game frame, the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

In this embodiment, for example, the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, or the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is played by the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It can be mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the machine frame 3. That is, one game board 2 (for example, the game board 2 of a predetermined model) can be attached to either the dedicated frame or the common frame. Further, by mounting the game board 2 to the mounting portion 160, the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN are connected, and among the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 provided on the game board 2, the game frame side The electronic components provided in the are connected to the production control board 12 by wiring.

Therefore, for example, the gaming board 2 manufactured to be mounted on a dedicated frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B at the stage of manufacturing and development at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine or after being delivered to the gaming shop. Even when the game board 2 manufactured to be mounted on the common frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the production control board 12 and the electronic components on the game frame side are connected by wiring. When the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on with the game board 2 that does not correspond to the game frame attached, the effect control of the movable body on the game frame side controlled by the effect control CPU 120 is different. Even if the CPU 120 for use outputs an operation signal or the like to the movable body on the game frame side, the movable body may not operate or the movable body may malfunction, and by outputting an incompatible operation signal. There is a possibility that an improper load will be applied to the motor or the like that is the drive source and the image will be burned.

Further, as will be described later, when performing an effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, an image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (see FIG. 18). When the game board 2 that does not correspond to the game frame is mounted, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the stick controller 31A or push button different from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B provided in the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted. The button 31B image may be displayed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game board 2 is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 detects the output from various detection means provided in the game frame. Based on the specific information, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is attached is a specific gaming machine frame (for example, a dedicated frame or a common frame), and is the specific gaming machine frame. It is possible to notify when it is determined that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a wiring connection state between various electronic components provided in the game frame including the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance control board 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which the game frame is a dedicated frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C). , Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, cover body motor 39C). Is provided with a serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B which is a common frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, the stick origin position sensor 35A, the stick pulling position sensor 35B, the vibration motor 35C, A serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data is provided between the stick motor 35D, the button sensor 36A, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D).

The serial conversion IC 130 shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B outputs serial data to the input port 131 to which detection signals (parallel data) from various electronic components are input and the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12. To the input port 131 based on the input state of the detection signal of each port number (0(H) to 7(a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131. The 16-bit serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal is generated, and the generated serial data can be output from the serial communication unit 132 to the effect control board 12.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, the effect control board 12 is provided on the game board 2 which is attachable to and detachable from the gaming machine frame 3, and is provided on the effect control board 12 and the game frame side. Since serial data communication is possible with the frame-side electronic component, the number of wires between the effect control board 12 and each frame-side electronic component can be reduced as compared with the case of communicating with parallel data. There is.

Although FIG. 8 shows a circuit configuration in which parallel data input from various electronic components of the game frame is converted to serial data by the serial conversion IC 130 and output to the production control board 12, the pachinko gaming machine 1A. , 1B have a parallel conversion IC (not shown) that converts various control information output from the production control board 12 as serial data into parallel data, which is not shown in detail, but is converted by the parallel conversion IC. Parallel data can be output to various electronic components of the game frame (for example, vibration motor 35C, rocket motor 37C, cover body motor 39C, stick motor 35D).

Further, in FIG. 8, for convenience of explanation, the detection signals from all the electronic components provided on the game frame side are input to the input port 131 of one serial conversion IC 130, but the present invention is not limited to this. The invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of serial conversion ICs 130 may be provided. Further, it is preferable that the serial conversion IC 130 is provided at a predetermined portion of the game frame (for example, the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50).

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, the rocket 45, and the cover body 28 are detected in the input port 131. A detection signal (a signal indicating an ON state) is output from the sensor. Then, the serial conversion IC 130 confirms the input state (on state, off state) of each signal of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131, and sends it to the input port 131. The 16-bit serial data capable of specifying the input state of the detection signal is generated and output to the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12 via the serial communication unit 132.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the serial conversion IC 130 inputs the signal of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a)) of the input port 131. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the serial data which can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 is generated and output to the effect control board 12 is illustrated. When the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the production control CPU 120 outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the serial conversion IC 130, and the input capture signal (latch signal) is input. The serial conversion IC 130 may generate serial data capable of specifying the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, drive signals from the vibration motor 35C, rocket motor 37C, cover body motor 39C, and stick motor 35D are input to the input port 131. Instead, a drive signal for the motor is output from the effect control CPU 120, and each motor is driven based on the drive signal, so that the drive signal is input to the input port 131.

In the present embodiment, the driving signal is input to the input port 131 by driving each motor based on the output of the motor driving signal from the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and detection means capable of detecting a motor may be provided so that a detection signal from the detection means is input when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9(A), in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which the game frame is a dedicated frame, detection signals from various electronic components of the game frame are port numbers 0(H) to 7(A) of the input port 131. ), 0(h) to 7(a), and as shown in FIG. 9(B), in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, which is a common frame, detection signals from various electronic components of the game frame are input ports 131. The port numbers 0(H) to 7(A) and 0(h) to 7(a) are input.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the button sensor 35 is connected to the port number 3 (E) in both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, and the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pulling position sensor 35B are , The pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are connected to port numbers 7(A) and 0(h), and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D are port numbers 4(d) to 7(a) for both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B. It is connected.

On the other hand, the vibration motor 35C is connected to the port number 2 (F) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the port number 0 (H) in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. That is, the port number to which the detection signal from the vibration motor 35C is input is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Further, the rocket origin position sensor 37A, the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, and the rocket motor 37C are connected to port numbers 4(D) to 6(B) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but port number 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. (D) to 6(B) are not connected. Further, the cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body open position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C are connected to port numbers 1(g) to 3(e) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Not connected to port numbers 1(g) to 3(e).

In this way, the detection signal input to the input port 131 of the serial conversion IC 130 is the button sensor 35, the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pull position sensor 35B, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D for both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B. Although input to a common port number, the vibration motor 35C is input to different port numbers between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B, and the rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket projecting position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, cover body motor 39C, the detection signal is input to a specific port number of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but a specific port number of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Is not entered in.

In other words, the effect control CPU 120 has different port numbers of the input ports 131 to which the detection signals are input between the dedicated frame and the common frame even if the detection target, the detection unit, and the drive source having the same function and application are the same. That the detection signal is input to only one of the special frame and the common frame at a specific port number, and the number of input ports of the detection signal is different between the special frame and the common frame. The special frame and the common frame are discriminated based on the discrimination item of.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 indicates to which port number of the input port 131 the detection signal from each electronic component of the dedicated frame and the common frame is input. The identifiable data is stored. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the port number to which the detection signal from a specific electronic component among various electronic components provided in the game frame is input in the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 when the power is turned on. By determining the serial data to be identified and confirming whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the identified serial data, it is determined whether the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached is a dedicated frame or a common frame. However, it is possible to make a notification based on the determination result.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main process shown in FIG. 10 when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, a first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. , To the origin position of each movable body (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable body 500L, 500R and fourth movable body 600L, 600R/movable body 700) provided on the game board 2 side Second initialization processing (S51A) for performing return and operation confirmation, and to the origin position of each movable body (rocket 45, cover body 28, stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, etc.) provided on the game frame side And the third initialization process (S51B) for confirming the operation. After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53), and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs command analysis processing (S54). In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 4) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received production control command are performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, after performing the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determining random number (S56), the sub-side error process (S57) is executed, and thereafter. After executing the sub-side notification process (S58), the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second initialization processing (S51A) of this embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes order data of the movable bodies, and in the present embodiment, the order is the first movable body 300→the second movable body 400→the third movable body 500L, 500R→the fourth movable body 600L, The order of 600R is preset. Therefore, when S101 is first executed, the first movable body 300 is specified as the target movable body. Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target movable body that needs to perform origin detection (S102).

In the present embodiment, as the origin detection target movable body that needs to perform the origin detection, only the movable body having the origin position detection sensor is applicable, and the movable body having no origin detection sensor is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is any of the movable bodies having the origin position detection sensor, it is determined as “Y” in the determination, while the movable body specified in S101 is the origin position detection sensor. If the movable body does not have it, it is determined to be "N".

When it is determined to be "N" in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when it is determined to be “Y” in S102, the process proceeds to S103, the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation target movable body is specified (S103), and it is determined whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

If the position is not at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, where 0 is set in the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control. (S105), as the control speed for operating the movable object to be operated, the operation speed is the same as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 13 and 14) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. The minimum control speed for operating the movable body is set (S106), and the drive motor of the movable body to be operated, for example, if the movable body to be operated is the first movable body 300, the first movable body drive motor 303 is used as the origin. When driving is started in the position direction, and for example, the operation target movable body is the first movable body 300, the lever motor 36 is also driven in the origin position direction (S107), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is set. It starts (S108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. ..

Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state in which the origin detection sensor is in the detection state and whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

By driving a drive device for the movable body to be operated (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303 or the like) toward the origin position, the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position), and the origin detection sensor detects the detected state. If so, the driving of the drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the movable object to be operated is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S113).

When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the driving of the drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored (S114), and the process proceeds to S130. .. That is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the actual operation confirmation operation control to be described later is not executed for the operation target movable body (the concerned position). The origin return error is stored in order to bring the movable body to be moved into the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the operation target movable body is in the dead end state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the initialization error process is started and the initialization error process is executed, By interrupting the 2 initialization process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) may not be activated (dead end state). ..

Moreover, when the operation target movable body is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated. For example, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an input signal indicating that the movable object is operated (for example, It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal of the effect button or the like, or preventing the movable body to be operated from operating even when the input signal is input.

On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the number of operation error determinations, the driving of the drive motor is stopped, the process returns to S106, and the process of S106 to S108 is performed again, so that the operation target is moved. The operation of moving the body to the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) (operation control during non-detection) is started, and the state shifts to the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above. ..

Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) of moving the movable object to be repeatedly moved to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the movable body to be operated is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be "Y" in S104 and the process proceeds to S120, after setting the detection operation count counter to 0, the detection operation process data is set (S121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. The timer count of is started (S121b). Note that, as the timer count of the detection time operation process timer, the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is used, like the timer count of the non-detection time operation period timer described above. It may be performed by counting the number. In addition, in the operation process data during detection of the present embodiment, as the control speed for operating the movable body to be operated, the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) described later (FIG. 13, FIG. 14), the minimum control speed for operating the movable body to be operated at the same operation speed is described (set).

Next, the movable body to be operated is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set operation process data for detection (S122), and it is determined whether the process data is completed (S123). If is not completed, the process returns to S122, and the movable body to be operated is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the detection process data.

As described above, in the detection operation control, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data until the detection operation process data is completed, that is, the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initial operation) At the lowest speed in the control of the activating operation, the operation of temporarily leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from a position distant from the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 13). It should be noted that the position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where the detected part of each movable body cannot be detected by each origin sensor and is closer to the origin position than each effect position (detection position). Time movement position).

If it is determined in S123 that the set operation process data for detection is completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, the process proceeds to S124, and it is determined whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection time operation number counter (S126). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the number-of-operations counter at detection reaches the number of operation error determinations, the process proceeds to S128, the origin return error of the movable body to be operated is stored (S128), and the process proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the detection operation control, the actual operation confirmation operation control described below is not executed for the operation target movable body (the operation concerned). The origin return error is stored in order to put the target movable body in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S127, the movable object is put into the dead end state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, by starting the initialization error process and executing the initialization error process when the value of the operation count counter during detection reaches the operation error determination count in S113. The production control main process may be interrupted without advancing to S52, and the production control board 12 may be set in a non-starting state (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target movable body is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but, for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the input signal (for example, the effect button) to operate the movable object. It is preferable to execute processing such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body to be operated even when the input signal is input.

In S130, which is executed when it is determined as “N” in S102, when determined as “Y” in S109, or when determined as “Y” in S124, the movable body is not yet an operation target. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, the operation target movable body is the third movable body 500), the actual state shown in FIG. The process shifts to the process of performing operation control for operation confirmation. On the other hand, when there is a remaining movable body, the procedure proceeds to S131, the movable body to be operated next is specified, and then the procedure returns to S102 to perform the above-described processing from S102 on the specified movable body. Do the same.

When S131 is executed when the movable body to be operated is the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400 is specified as the movable body to be operated based on the setting data, and the movable body to be moved is the first movable body. When S131 is executed in the case of the two movable body 400, the (operation lever 31) is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is the (operation lever 31). When S131 is executed, the third movable body 500 is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data.

Next, the processing shown in FIG. 12 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 firstly confirms the operation based on the setting data (confirmation target movable body) similarly to S101 described above. Is specified (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a memory of the origin return error of the target movable body (S201).

When the origin return error of the confirmation target movable body is stored, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes of S202a to S213. By doing so, in the present embodiment, the actual operation confirmation operation control is not performed for the movable body determined to be the origin return error in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

On the other hand, if the origin return error of the confirmation target movable body is not stored, the process proceeds to S202a to set the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the confirmation target movable body. That is, if the confirmation target movable body is the first movable body 300, the actual operation confirmation process data of the first movable body 300 is set, and if the confirmation target movable body is the second movable body 400, the second movable body is generated. If the actual operation confirmation process data of 400 is set and the confirmation target movable body is the (operation lever 31), the actual operation confirmation process data of the (operation lever 31) is set, and the confirmation target movable body moves to the third movable state. If it is the body 500, the actual operation confirmation process data of the third movable body 500 is set. In each actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the actual operation in the movable body production in the production.

Then, the actual operation confirmation process timer starts counting (S202b). The timer count of the process timer for confirming the actual operation is a signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals, as in the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be performed by counting the number of.

Then, the confirmation target movable body is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data (S203), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not (S204), and when the process data is not completed, the process returns to S203, and the confirmation target movable body is set in correspondence with the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer at that time. It operates based on the controlled speed.

In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the confirmation target movable body is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. By doing so, it is possible to sequentially change the control speed of the confirmation target movable body in time series and perform the same acceleration or deceleration as the control speed set when actually moving the movable body in the movable body effect. it can.

Then, in the determination of S204, when it is determined that the set process data for actual operation confirmation is completed, the driving of the drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the confirmation target movable body is the origin detection target movable body. It is determined whether or not (S204a). If the confirmation target movable body is not the origin detection target movable body, that is, if it is the third movable body 500, the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the target accessory is the origin detection target movable body, that is, if the first movable body 300 or the second movable body 400, whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the movement target movable body. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the movable body to be checked is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be checked is not located at the origin position (initial position), the non-detection operation control described above (see FIG. 11) is performed. The processing of S206 to S213 is performed in order to position the movable object to be confirmed at the origin position (initial position).

Specifically, after setting the non-detection time operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control to 0 (S206), the actual speed confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is set as the control speed. The minimum control speed for operating the operation target movable body at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in step S207 is set (S207), and if the confirmation target movable body drive device is, for example, the confirmation target movable body is the first movable body 300. The driving of the first movable body drive motor 303 is started in the origin position (initial position) direction (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

Then, the process moves to a monitoring state in which the origin detection sensor is in the detection state and whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

The confirmation target movable body is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the confirmation target movable body driving device (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303) toward the origin position (initial position), and the origin detection sensor In the case of the detection state, it is determined as “Y” in S210 and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the confirmation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). Yes (S213).

When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S220. In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the operation target movable body is in the dead end state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored, and the operation target movable body May not execute the actual operation. Alternatively, the initialization error process is started, and the second initialization process is interrupted by executing the initialization error process, so that the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52. May not be activated (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target movable body is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but, for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the input signal (for example, the effect button) to operate the movable object. It is preferable to execute processing such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body to be operated even when the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the number of operation error determinations, the process returns to S207 and the steps S207, S208, and S209 are performed again to confirm the actual operation of the movable object to be confirmed. The operation for moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control for operation (long initialization operation control) (operation for returning to origin) is started, and the process shifts to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) of repeatedly moving the movable body to be checked to the origin position (initial position) is performed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the movable body to be checked is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the above, the process proceeds to S220.

In S220 which is executed when "Y" is determined in S201, "N" is determined in S204a, "Y" is determined in S205, or when "Y" is determined in S210. , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body that is not yet a target of confirmation of the operation confirmation among the movable bodies, and if there is no remaining movable body (specifically, the target object of the operation confirmation is In the case of three movable bodies 500), the record of the error stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the processing ends, while when there are remaining movable bodies, the process proceeds to S221. Then, after the movable body to be checked for operation is specified, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing after S201 is similarly executed for the specified target object.

Here, the operation mode and control contents of the movable body due to the execution of the second initialization processing shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection time operation control, the detection time operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the production control CPU 120. 14, (A) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, (B) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the detection time operation control, and (C) is the control speed in the non-detection time operation control. FIG.

13 and 14, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control), the detection operation control (short initialization operation control), and the actual operation confirmation operation in the movable body that is the origin detection target movable body. Only the control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and description of the movable body that is not the origin detection target movable body will be omitted. Further, although the reciprocal movement distance (rotation range) of the first movable body 300 and the reciprocation movement distance (movement range) of the second movable body 400 are not the same, for convenience of explanation, The explanation will be given using the same conceptual diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13, each movable body is provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between an origin position (retracted position, initial position) and an effect position (operable position), and from the origin position to the effect position. The forward movement and the returning movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operations that are actually performed in the above-described movable body effect.

When the detected part of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable body is the origin for some reason (for example, at the time of transportation or installation on a game island). If it has been moved from its position, or if the home position could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when performing the performance, the home position of the movable body could not be confirmed or operated due to motor out-of-step, failure, catching, etc.) Corresponding to the non-detection operation control in the position other than the origin position (for example, when there is a movable body error (abnormal operation) such as when it disappears) or when it moves from the origin position due to the vibration of the game machine When it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by a black circle, the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is located at a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the detection operation control when the detected part of each movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period is set between when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and when the operation of the movable body in the origin position direction is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, it may return to the origin and stop at a position further inward than the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the detection-time operation control for returning the movable body to the more accurate origin position is performed.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to cancel the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor, but it is necessary to return to the origin position. Since it is not necessary to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a distance shorter than the actual operation.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed by the movable body in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 14A, 14B, and 14C are control speeds set by the production control CPU 120 to operate each movable body, and are the actual speeds of the movable body. Operating speed is different. That is, for example, in the case of operating a predetermined movable body, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section and another The movable body was actually operated when the mode was different between the moving section (for example, a section with a spring, a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when the same moving section went up and down. The operating speed in some cases may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies, the actual operating speed of each movable body may not be the same if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body. Not the same. When a plurality of movable bodies are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body If there is a difference between the two, the actual operating speed of each movable body is not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, it corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The confirmation target movable body is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, the control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, decelerating and stopping at the effect position, and accelerating from the effect position and then decelerating and stopping at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed→high speed→low speed between the origin position and the production position. Let That is, when performing the movable body effect of each movable body, the effect control CPU 120 has a range between a minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and a maximum speed (high speed) that is a second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body is controlled to operate at a speed within the range, even when performing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed are set. Each movable body is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speed of the movable body, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speed. Will be. In the following description, it is assumed that the movable body operates at the minimum speed when operating on the basis of the minimum control speed, and operates at the maximum speed when operating on the basis of the maximum control speed. To do.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body is reliably controlled by controlling it to the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. After decelerating, the origin detection sensor detects the detected part.

As shown in FIG. 14B, when performing the operation control at the time of detection, the effect control CPU 120 always confirms the actual operation in the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for use. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control as the second operation control (in the present embodiment, the actual operation check is performed. Control so that the movable body is operated based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so that the speed becomes the same as the minimum speed in the operation control.

In addition, in the case of motion control during detection, since the motion distance of the movable body is shorter than that in the motion control for actual motion confirmation, the origin detection is performed when operating at the control speed when accelerating in the motion control for actual motion confirmation, that is, at high speed. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detected part or the movable body may be damaged by the impact when the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and its movement is restricted. Control to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14C, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled so that it operates at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the example, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. Take control.

In this case, it is unclear how far the movable body is from the origin position. Therefore, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation That is, when operated at high speed, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected part when the movable body returns to the origin position, or the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and movement is restricted. Since the movable body or the like may be damaged by the impact at this time, control is performed such that the movable body operates at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control as the first operation control, the effect control CPU 120 sets the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Based on this, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operation speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each movable body, and are not the common operation speeds for each movable body, the minimum speeds for each movable body may differ.

Specifically, the operation lever 31 of the first movable portion 302 of the first movable body 300 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second movable body 400 has a size, a weight, and an operation as shown in FIG. Since the mode, the operating distance, and the drive mechanism including the drive motor are different, the actual operating speed of the movable body is different even when the same control speed is set. Further, even when different control speeds are set for the respective movable bodies, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies are different. In this way, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the movable body. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the third initialization processing (S51B) of this embodiment. In the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), and 2 (f) of the input port 131 from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130. Serial data, that is, the detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45 that is not mounted in the common frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the port number 4 (D), and the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B. Port number 5 (C), the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and the detection signal from the cover body open position sensor 39B is input. The serial data of the port number 2(f) is specified (S61).

Next, it is determined whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S62), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4(D)). ) Or the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7(A)), the rocket motor 37C is driven by the rocket motor 37C because it is likely to be a dedicated frame. After initialization of 45 (return operation to the origin position) and identification of serial data of the port number 6 (B) (S63), the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). (Returning operation to) is performed to identify the serial data of port number 3(e) (S64).

Then, it is determined whether or not both the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S65), and both the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are determined. If the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, it is assumed that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C which are not in the common frame are mounted, and the special frame flag indicating that the game frame is the special frame is set ( (S66), the notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is a dedicated frame is started (S67), and the process ends.

If both the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S65, one of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) indicates the input state of the drive signal. It is determined whether the data is data (S68), and if one of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, an operation error occurs in the other movable body. Error information about the movable body corresponding to the data in the non-input state of the drive signal is stored (S69), and the process proceeds to S66. That is, if one is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, there is a high possibility that only the operation error occurs in the other movable body, so it is determined that the frame is a dedicated frame.

In S68, if one of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, both of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are in the input state of the drive signal. If it is not data indicating that there is a possibility that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C are not mounted in the common frame, the vibration motor 35C is driven and port numbers 2 (F) and 0 (H) The serial data is specified (S70).

Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S71), and if the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, a game is played. Since it is highly possible that the frame is a dedicated frame, the process proceeds to S69. On the other hand, if port number 2 (F) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, if port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it may be a common frame. Since it is not possible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, the process proceeds to S72. In other words, it is determined that the frame is likely to be the dedicated frame when the input state of the detection signal from the operating means is confirmed, but it is possible that the frame is the common frame when the input state of the drive signal from the movable body is confirmed. As a result of the determination, it is not possible to specify whether it is the dedicated frame or the common frame, and it is determined that some sort of abnormality is likely to occur.

If there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S62, the vibration motor 35C is driven to specify the serial data of the port number 0 (H) (S80). Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S81), and if the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, common Assuming that the frame is likely to be a frame, the stick motor 35D is driven to initialize the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position), and the serial data of the port number 1 (G) is specified (S82). Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S83), and if the port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the process proceeds to S85. If the port number 1 (G) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the error information of the stick controller 31A corresponding to the data in which the drive signal is not input is stored (S84), and then the process proceeds to S85. Then, the common frame flag indicating that it is the common frame, which is the pachinko gaming machine 1B, is set (S85), and the notification B indicating that it is the common frame (see FIG. 16B) is started (S86), and the processing is performed. To finish.

In this way, the stick controller 31A is initialized (return operation to the origin position) before checking the input state of the drive signal of the port number 1 (G), so that the stick controller 31A may be present. However, because the stick controller 31A has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason, the port number 1 (G) does not become data indicating the input state of the drive signal, so it is determined that it is not a common frame. You can avoid doing it.

If the port number 0 (H) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S81, it may be a dedicated frame, so whether the port number 2 (F) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal or not. If it is determined that the port number 2(F) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it is highly possible that the frame is a dedicated frame. Therefore, the process proceeds to S63 and the port number 2(F) outputs the drive signal. If the data does not indicate the input state of, it is difficult to specify whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and thus the process proceeds to S72.

If the port number 2 (F) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S71 or S87, it is impossible (or difficult) to specify whether it is the dedicated frame or the common frame, and thus the pachinko that is the common frame. A common frame flag indicating that it is the gaming machine 1B is set (S72), a notification C indicating that it is a common frame (see FIG. 16C) is started (S73), and the process ends.

In S72, it is not possible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, but by setting a common frame flag indicating that the common frame is more versatile than the dedicated frame, the effect control is performed. Although the CPU 120 tentatively exemplifies a mode in which the subsequent control can be performed assuming that the frame is the common frame, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated frame flag indicating that the frame is a dedicated frame is set. The flag may be set, or a separate flag may be set to indicate that it cannot be specified.

Further, when the error state of the movable body is stored in S69 and S84, the error state is not erased unless the RAM is cleared. Therefore, regarding the movable body stored as the error state when proceeding to the subsequent processing. Since the operation control can be disabled (the target movable body is put into a dead end state), the operation control of the movable body, which may have a problem, can be performed to the drive source such as the motor. It is possible to suppress the load.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the various notifications A to C started in S67, S73, and S86 in S58 in the effect control main processing. More specifically, the notification A and the notification B are ended at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the notification was started, and the notification C is determined by a predetermined release condition (for example, a power-off state). , Clear RAM, etc.) is satisfied.

Next, a notification mode of various notifications executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the gaming machine frame 3 is a dedicated frame, as shown in FIG. 16(A), “the gaming machine frame is a “dedicated frame” is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The notification A for displaying the image G1 is displayed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the gaming machine frame 3 is the common frame, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the display screen of the effect display device 5 displays “the gaming machine frame is the common frame”. The notification B for displaying the image G2 "" is executed. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine frame 3 is the dedicated frame or the common frame, the effect display device 5 displays the display as shown in FIG. 16C. An image G3 is displayed on the screen, which indicates "A board frame mismatch error, please check the combination of the game machine frame and the game board or the operation status of the movable body." To execute.

In this way, the notification whether the gaming machine frame 3 equipped with the gaming board 2 is a dedicated frame or a common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame pachinko gaming machine 1A and the common frame pachinko gaming machine 1B, respectively. By performing by means of the effect display device 5 (5A), the player is recognizably notified whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame or cannot be specified. You can Further, like the notification C, the notification may be performed by using other notification means such as the effect LED 9 other than the effect display device 5 and the skylight emitting section 47.

Moreover, when the operation error of the movable body is stored in S114, S128, and S214 in the second initialization process of S51A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the display screen as shown in FIG. 16D. It is also possible to display the image G4 of "Vibration motor error" on the screen and execute the notification D for lighting the effect LEDs 9 on the left and right of the display screen in a predetermined manner.

Further, when the error information of the movable body corresponding to the data in the non-input state is stored in S69 or S84 in the third initialization processing of S51B, that is, there is a possibility that an operation error of the movable body on the game frame side has occurred. In some cases, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display screen of the effect display device 5 to display an image G5 that is a “frame moving object error” as shown in FIG. 16(E), and also effects on the upper left and right sides of the display screen. You may perform the notification E which lights the LED 9 for use in a predetermined mode. Further, in the case of an operation error of the stick controller, an image G6 of "stick controller error" is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the skylight emitting portion 47 which is only in the common frame above the display screen is turned on in a predetermined mode. The notification E may be executed.

In addition, in FIG. 16, as an example of the notification means, a form in which a display device such as the effect display device 5 and a light emitting body such as the effect LED 9 or the sky light emitting part 47 is described is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the speakers 8L and 8R capable of outputting sound may be applied as the notification means.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S55) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage content of the hold storage buffer. Pending display update processing for updating the display is executed (S172).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S173 to S179 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Fluctuating pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173): It is confirmed whether or not a varying pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed in the command analysis process whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (S174).

Production symbol variation start processing (S174): Control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (S175).

Production symbol fluctuation process (S175): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the change time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S176).

Production symbol fluctuation stop process (S176): Based on the reception of the production control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S177) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173).

Big hit display processing (S177): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process (S178).

Big hit game processing (S178): The big hit game is controlled. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (S179).

Big hit end effect processing (S179): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173).

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 has a predetermined timing (for example, a movable object effect) during the effect symbol variation process (S175), the big hit display process (S177), the big hit game process (S178), the big hit game process (S178), and the like. When the execution condition of is satisfied), it is possible to execute the movable body effect of moving the movable object between the origin position and the effect position.

As described above, in the pachinko game machines 1A and 1B as the embodiments of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 is attachable/detachable And the game board 2 has the effect control CPU 120 as a control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a special frame) including a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame). , A dedicated frame and a common frame), the game frame can be attached to and detached from the game frame, and the detection means (for example, the stick origin position sensor 35A, the stick) that can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. Pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.) The serial conversion IC 130 can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 is output from the game frame. Based on the detected specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is determined whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or common frame), and the dedicated frame (or common frame) When it is determined that it is a frame, a notification is given.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the common frame on the special frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the dedicated frame on the common frame.

Specifically, by mounting the game board 2 on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 provided on the game board 2 inputs the detection signal to the input port 131 by the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By confirming the state, not only is it determined whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, but the result display device 5 notifies the determination result, so whether or not the game board 2 and the game frame match. The operator can easily recognize that. Therefore, when the power is turned on and a game is played in a state where the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, the effect control CPU 120 sets the movable body mounted in the mounted game frame as the movable body. Causes the motor to be driven based on the operation control data of a different movable body, which causes a load on the motor, etc., which is the drive source of the movable body, and burns in, or damage to parts of the movable body. It can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a movable body and a frame body (for example, an opening/closing frame 50) provided with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing a game area, as described from FIG. 22 onward. (For example, the first movable body 300 and the like), the window portion is provided on the game area side of the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and the first transparent member, A second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) in which a hole (for example, a hole 270) or a cutout is formed, and between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. At least a part of the movable body can enter the formed space (for example, the space S) via the hole or the notch. Therefore, when the game board 2 having such a first movable body 300 is attached to the common frame, the window 51 of the common frame has a hole or a cutout into which the first movable body 300 can enter. Since there is no such a case, the first movable body 300 may collide with and damage the window 51 when the first movable body 300 is operated. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting 2 on the common frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled by the control means (production control CPU 120) provided on the game board 2 and the production control CPU 120 mounted on a plurality of types of game frames. Since it can be specified using a plurality of detecting means capable of detecting the operating means and the movable body, for example, it is provided on the game board 2 by providing identification information capable of identifying each in a plurality of types of game frames. The control means can easily perform the determination without reading the identification information.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the serial data of the specific port number in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization processing of S51B, and detects the detected signal in the specified serial data. It is determined whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not there is data indicating the input state of.

By doing so, it is possible to preferably determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). For example, a particular port number (for example, 4( D), 5(C), 1(g), 2(f)) serial data is specified, and a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal. By determining whether or not it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame).

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B, and sets the specified serial data. Whether there is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined by whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal.

By doing so, it is possible to preferably determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). For example, a plurality of port numbers (for example, 4(D), 5(C) to which detection signals from a plurality of origin position sensors capable of detecting that the movable body mounted only in the dedicated frame is at the origin position are input. ) 1(g), 2(f)) serial data is specified, and whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether the specified serial data has data indicating the input state of the detection signal. By doing so, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the frame is the dedicated frame (or the common frame), as compared with the case of determining based on the serial data of one port number.

In addition, the game frame includes operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.), and the serial conversion IC 130 outputs detection signals to the input port 131 from the stick controller 31A and push button 31B. It is possible to generate serial data that can specify the input state of and output to the effect control board 12.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality. In addition, the operating means that can be operated by the player is likely to be installed in many models regardless of whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and there is a possibility that the design, operation mode, etc. may be changed in various game frames. Therefore, if the input state of the detection signal from the operating means is used, the type of the game frame can be easily specified.

In addition, the game frame includes an operable movable body (for example, a rocket 45 of a dedicated frame, a cover body 48, a stick controller 31A, etc.), the serial conversion IC 130, the vibration motor 35C to the input port 131, rocket motor 37C, It is possible to generate serial data that can specify the input states of the drive signals from the cover body motor 39C and the stick motor 35D and output the serial data to the effect control board 12.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality. Also, the movable body is likely to be mounted on many models regardless of whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and the design and operation mode are likely to be changed in various game frames. By using the input state of the drive signal from the movable body, it becomes easy to specify the type of game frame.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the notification means (for example, effect display devices 5 and 5A, effect LED 9 and the like) that are commonly provided for a plurality of types of game frames to notify.

By doing so, it is possible to properly notify any type of game frame. That is, even when the game board 2 is mounted on a common frame that is not a dedicated frame, it is possible to notify that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble.

Further, the game can be executed even if the effect control CPU 120 notifies, and the use of the detection target object that is the object of the notification is restricted. Specifically, it becomes possible for the production control CPU 120 to play a game while leaving the movable body in which the error information is stored in the third initialization processing of S51B in the dead end state.

By doing so, the occurrence of abnormality can be prevented. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent the effect control CPU 120 from executing control based on inappropriate control data, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a defect.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1A, 1B as an embodiment of the present invention, it is provided with a game board 2 (first mechanism body) and a game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 is detachable, The game board 2 has the effect control CPU 120 as control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a special frame and a special frame) including a specific game frame (for example, a special frame). The game frame is attachable to and detachable from the common frame), and the game frame has a detection means (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A and a stick pull position sensor 35B) capable of detecting the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. , Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.), and serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame. Can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 outputs the detection specifying information output from the game frame. Based on (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is possible to determine whether the game frame in which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame).

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the common frame on the special frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the dedicated frame on the common frame.

Specifically, by mounting the game board 2 on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 provided on the game board 2 inputs the detection signal to the input port 131 by the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By checking the state, it is determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame. Therefore, when the power is turned on and a game is played in a state where the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, the effect control CPU 120 sets the movable body mounted in the mounted game frame as the movable body. Causes the motor to be driven based on the operation control data of a different movable body, which causes a load on the motor, etc., which is the drive source of the movable body, and burns in, or damage to parts of the movable body. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization operation control of the movable body in S63 and S64 in the third initialization process of S51B, so that the drive signal from the motor that drives the movable body. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection state of each detection unit changes due to the execution of the initialization operation control. May specify the game frame type by specifying the serial data of the port number to which the detection signal from the origin position detection sensor of the movable body is input when the initialization operation control is executed.

By doing so, an accurate determination can be made. Specifically, before confirming the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor of the movable body, initialization of the rocket 45 and the cover body 28 (returning operation to the origin position) is performed, so that the rocket 45 and the cover body Despite the presence of 28, the movable body has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason, and the data indicating the input state of the detection signal is not obtained. It can be avoided.

Since the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the cross button 46, which are the operating means, are always positioned at the origin position by a biasing means (not shown), the initialization process is executed in this embodiment. Although the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor is confirmed without doing so, the input state of the detection signal may be confirmed after executing the initialization process. Further, the movable body may be specified by confirming the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor without executing the initialization process for the movable body.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the third initialization process of S51B, the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached is determined, and then the determination result is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is not always necessary to inform the determination result after determining the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached. In this case, the game may be played while the game board 2 is attached to the irregular game frame, but the effect control CPU 120 sets the error state of the movable body in the third initialization process of S51B. Since it is stored, the movable body does not operate, but it can be avoided that the movable body operates under a load.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the game board 2 having a special frame is mounted on the common frame or when the game board 2 having the common frame is mounted on the special frame, that is, the game board 2 is mounted on the irregular game frame. Even in the case, when the type of the mounted game frame can be specified, the type of the specified game frame is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is not When attached to a regular game frame or a regular game frame, the fact that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match or match is notified even if the type of the game frame cannot be specified Good. Further, the error notification may be performed only when it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, and the notification may not be performed when it is determined that they match. Alternatively, when the game board 2 is attached to an irregular game frame, the game may be disabled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached cannot be specified is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it cannot be specified, the fact that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match may be notified so that it can be specified, or an error notification may be given.

In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of determining whether the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached in the third initialization process of S51B is a dedicated frame or a common frame. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, it is determined whether the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame. That is, it may be determined whether or not it is a specific game frame (for example, a special frame or a special frame).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode of executing the process of determining whether the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is the special frame or the common frame in the third initialization process of S51B is illustrated, but The invention is not limited to this. Initialization processing of the movable body of the game frame (return operation control to the origin position) and the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted are either a dedicated frame or a common frame. Alternatively, the processing for determining whether or not this may be performed separately. In other words, at least if processing for identifying whether the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is attached is a dedicated frame or a common frame is notified of the determination result or the game is performed based on the determination result. It suffices if the electronic components on the frame side are controlled.

Further, in the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the specific port number, that is, the dedicated frame and the common frame, from the serial data received from the game frame serial conversion IC 130 in the third initialization process of S51B. Although the serial data of the possible port number is specified, and whether or not the specified data includes the data indicating the input state of the detection signal to determine whether the frame is a dedicated frame is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be determined whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the game frame side serial conversion IC 130.

For example, when a movable body mounted on a dedicated frame and a movable body mounted on a common frame are returned to the origin position by initialization operation control, after the movable body is detected by the origin position detection sensor, If the time to stop the movable body is different, it is possible to determine whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame by the difference in the time when the signal from the origin position detection sensor is input. Even when the number of signals input to the port and the number of bits (port number) input are the same, it is possible to determine whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the third initialization process of S51B for specifying the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled to return the original position of the movable body provided on the game board 2 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third initialization process may be performed before the second initialization process. The third initialization process and the second initialization process may be performed together in one initialization process.

Further, when the third initialization process is executed before the second initialization process, it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match in the third initialization process, or the game frame. When it is determined that the type cannot be specified, the processing after the second initialization processing may not be executed, and by doing so, the game board 2 and the game frame do not match with each other. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a trouble due to the above.

Next, a first modified example of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 18A to 18C are diagrams showing an example of display modes in the dedicated frame, and FIGS. 18D to 18F are diagrams showing examples of display modes in the common frame.

As shown in FIG. 18, for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B at a predetermined timing during variable display of symbols or a big hit game state. Therefore, as the operation promotion effect, it is possible to display an image prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

More specifically, in the case of the dedicated frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18A, an image G10 of “press!” and an image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the dedicated frame, Is displayed, and in the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 18(B), an image G12 of “withdrawal!!” and an image G13 corresponding to the stick controller 31A of the special frame are displayed. ..

On the other hand, in the case of the common frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18D, an image G10 of "press!" and an image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the common frame. In the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, G21 different from and is displayed. As shown in FIG. 18(E), an image G12 of “withdrawal!!” and an image corresponding to the stick controller 31A of the common frame are displayed. An image G23 different from the existing image G13 is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may display an image that prompts the player to remove the ball, for example, at a timing when it is necessary to remove the ball, such as during a big hit game. Specifically, in the case of a dedicated frame that does not have a lower plate, as shown in FIG. 18C, an image G14 of "please remove the ball" is displayed, but a common frame having a lower plate 91 is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18F, an image G24 different from the image G14 such as "The lower plate is full. Please pull out the ball" is displayed.

In the embodiment, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided in the game board 2 mounted in the special frame stores the operation control data and the image data corresponding to the special frame, and the game board 2 mounted in the common frame. In the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided in, the operation control data and the image data corresponding to the common frame are stored, so that the game board 2 corresponding to the special frame can be attached to the common frame or the common frame can be supported. When the game board 2 is mounted in a dedicated frame, that is, when the game board 2 is mounted in an irregular (not compatible) game frame, the operation control of the movable body is executed based on the operation control data that does not correspond, The image of the operating means is displayed based on the image data that does not correspond.

Here, in the case where one gaming board 2 can be mounted and used on both the gaming machine frame 3 which is a dedicated frame and the gaming machine frame 3 which is a common frame, the effect control board 12 In the ROM 121, the operation control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the dedicated frame and the operation control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the common frame, that is, the operation control data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of game frames, The image data is stored in advance, and depending on which of the dedicated frame flag and the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, the operation control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the set flag are set. By making it possible to perform operation control and display control based on this, it is possible to perform control corresponding to the movable body and the operating means of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted.

By doing so, when the game board 2 is attached to the dedicated frame, based on the control data corresponding to the dedicated frame, for example, the display control and the movable body as shown in FIGS. 18 can be executed, and when the game board 2 is mounted in the common frame, based on the control data corresponding to the common frame, for example, as shown in FIGS. Since display control and movable body operation control can be executed, operation control is executed without imposing a load on electronic parts such as motors, and control is performed to display an image that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness. It becomes possible to do.

As described above, in the pachinko game machines 1A and 1B according to the embodiment of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 is detachable are provided. The game board 2 includes the effect control CPU 120 as control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and a plurality of types of game frames (eg, exclusive frame) including a specific game frame (eg, exclusive frame). The game frame is attachable to and detachable from a frame and a common frame, and the game frame is a detection unit (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A, a stick pulling position) capable of detecting the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. A sensor 35B, a button sensor 36A, a rocket origin position sensor 37A, a rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, a cover body origin position sensor 39A, a cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.), and a serial provided in the game frame. The conversion IC 130 can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 detects the output from the game frame. Based on the specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC130), it is determined whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), and the effect based on the determination result. It is possible to perform (for example, the operation promotion effect and the ball removal error effect shown in FIG. 18).

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the common frame on the special frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by mounting the game board 2 for the dedicated frame on the common frame.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanism bodies, based on the result of the determination. For example, when the special frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the special frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18A to 18C), and S51B. When the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of No. 3, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18D to 18F).

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of game frame.

In addition, a plurality of types of game frames include a common frame having an operable movable body (for example, the stick controller 31A of the common frame), and in the case of the common frame, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, FIG. When performing the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A as shown, an effect of raising the stick controller 31A to the raised position may be executable.

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of game frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, based on the result of specifying the type of game frame in the third initialization process of S51B, in the effect symbol variation process and the big hit game process, the effect according to the type of the game frame (for example, , See FIG. 18).

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of game frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and for example, at a predetermined effect timing such as during variable display of symbols or during a big hit game state. It is possible to perform an effect in a mode according to the determination result. For example, when the dedicated frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the dedicated frame at each effect timing (FIGS. 18A to 18(A). If the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B), an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18D to 18F). ).

By doing so, an appropriate effect can be performed according to the type of game frame.

Next, a second modified example of the present invention will be described based on FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the third initialization process in the second modification of the present invention.

In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 performs operation control and display control based on operation control data and image data according to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B. Although the form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting changeover switch 55 connected to the effect control board 12 is provided with either the control corresponding to the dedicated frame or the control corresponding to the common frame. A function such that a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can perform switching operation may be added, and the effect control CPU 120 may perform control according to the content set by the setting switch 55.

Here, an example of the third initialization process in the case where the effect control CPU 120 is allowed to perform control according to the content set by the setting switch 55 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the content set by the setting changeover switch 55 is set in the dedicated frame (S301). In the case of a dedicated frame, the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 is converted into the serial data of the port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), and 2 (f) in the input port 131, that is, non-serialized data. The detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45 which is not mounted in the common frame of the regular pachinko gaming machine 1B is input, and the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B is input. Port number 5 (C), a port number 1 (g) to which a detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and a port number 2 to which a detection signal from the cover body open position sensor 39B is input. The serial data of (f) is specified (S302).

Next, it is determined whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S303), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4(D) ) Or the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7(A)), the rocket motor 37C is driven by the rocket motor 37C because it is likely to be a dedicated frame. After initialization of 45 (returning operation to the origin position) and specifying the serial data of the port number 6 (B) (S304), the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). (Return operation to) is performed to identify the serial data of port number 3(e) (S305).

Then, it is determined whether or not both of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S306), and both of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are determined. If the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, it is assumed that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C which are not in the common frame are mounted, and the special frame flag indicating that the game frame is the special frame is set ( (S307), the notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is a dedicated frame is started (S308), and the process ends.

In S301, if the setting contents by the setting changeover switch 55 are not set in the dedicated frame, that is, in the common frame, the serial data of the port numbers 3(E) and 7(A) are specified (S310). Next, it is determined whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S311), and if there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the vibration motor 35C is driven, and if there is a common frame, the detection signal is After identifying the serial data of the port number 0 (H) to be input (S312), it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S313).

When the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the stick motor 335C is driven to initialize the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position), and the port number 1 (G After specifying the serial data of () (S314), it is determined whether the port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S315). Then, when the port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, since there is the stick motor 35D mounted only in the common frame, the common frame flag indicating the common frame is set. (S316), the notification B indicating that the frame is the common frame (see FIG. 16B) is started (S317), and the process ends.

Further, when there is no serial data in S303, when both of the port numbers 6(B) and 3(e) are not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S306, and there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S311. , S313, the port number 0 (H) is not the data indicating the input state of the signal, or the port number 1 (G) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal at S315, the frame is a dedicated frame. Since it is not possible to specify whether it is the common frame or not, the common frame flag indicating that it is the pachinko gaming machine 1B which is the common frame is set (S318), and the notification C indicating that it is the common frame (FIG. 16 (C ) Reference) is started (S319), and the process ends.

As described above, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 is attachable and detachable are provided, and the game board 2 can control the game board 2 and the game frame. The CPU 120 for effect control as a control means, and a setting means capable of setting either the type of the regular game frame of the game board 2 or the type of the non-regular game frame of the game board 2 (for example, the setting changeover switch 55 ), and is attachable/detachable to/from a game frame (for example, a special frame and a common frame), and the game frame is capable of detecting the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. Means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position) The serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame, which includes a sensor 39B, etc., can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the production control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130, whether or not the game board 2 matches the type of the game frame set by the setting switch 55.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles due to the game board 2 being attached to the irregular game frame. Specifically, when the game board 2 is mounted on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 sets the game board 2 by the setting changeover switch 55 based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. Even if there are many types of game frames, the game board 2 and the game frames match in order to determine whether or not they match the type of the game frame that is being used, that is, whether or not the game frame is attached to the regular game frame. It can be easily determined whether or not

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the first initialization operation control (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) corresponding to one game frame of the plurality of types of game frames, and other game frames. It is possible to execute the second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B) that is performed based on the detection specific information at the time of execution of each of the first initialization operation control and the second initialization operation control. You may make it determine the type of game frame.

By doing so, an accurate determination can be made.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the first initialization operation control (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) corresponding to one game frame of the plurality of types of game frames, and other game frames. The second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B) can be executed, and the setting content of the setting changeover switch 55 is confirmed in S301 of the third initialization process of S51B, If it is set to the frame, the initialization operation control corresponding to the dedicated frame is executed in 304 and S305, and if it is set to the common frame, the initialization operation control corresponding to the common frame is executed in S312 and S314. , The type of the game frame is determined based on the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130.

By doing so, an accurate determination can be made. Specifically, when the game board 2 is mounted on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 executes only S304 and S305 when the setting changeover switch 55 is set to the special frame in the third initialization process of S51B. However, when the setting changeover switch 55 is set to the common frame, only S314 needs to be executed. Therefore, even if there are many types of game frames, it is easy to determine whether the game board 2 and the game frame match. Can be determined.

Next, a third modified example of the present invention will be described based on FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the third modification of the present invention.

In Modification Example 1, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect control process process in S55, based on the operation control data and the image data corresponding to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B. Although the mode in which the operation control and the display control are performed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 20, as the effect control process processing in S55, the first corresponding to the dedicated frame in advance. The effect control process process (S55A) and the second effect control process process (S55B) corresponding to the common frame are set to be executable, and when the set flag is the exclusive frame, the first effect control process process (S55A). When the set flag is a common frame, the second effect control process process (S55B) may be executed.

Next, a fourth modified example of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 21A and 21B are views for explaining a modified example 4 of the present invention, in which FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing a main part of a dedicated frame, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view showing a main part of a common frame.

In the embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3, the gaming board 2 is exemplified as a form that can be mounted on both the gaming machine frame 3 of both the special frame and the common frame, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame or the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame, it may be difficult to play the game.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 21A, a convex portion 800 is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame, and a convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame. 21B, a concave portion 801 capable of accommodating the convex portion 800 is formed, while as shown in FIG. 21B, a concave portion 801 is formed at a position corresponding to the convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 of the common frame. do not do. By doing so, when the game board 2 corresponding to the exclusive frame is mounted on the common frame, even if the opening/closing frame 50 is closed, the convex portion 800 comes into contact with the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 and cannot be closed. Can be in a difficult state.

In addition, a part of the movable body provided on the game board 2 of the exclusive frame protrudes toward the opening/closing frame 50 side at the origin position, and is housed in the window portion 51 side protruding forward when the opening/closing frame 50 is closed. In this case, even if the game board 2 of the exclusive frame is mounted on the common frame, even if the opening/closing frame 50 of the common frame is closed, the convex portion 800 abuts on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 and cannot be closed. This makes it possible to prevent the closed open/close frame 50 from coming into contact with the movable body protruding forward from the game board 2 and damaging the movable body.

Although not particularly shown, a convex portion is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame, and a concave portion capable of accommodating the convex portion at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 of the common frame. On the other hand, the concave portion may not be formed at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame, and by doing so, the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame can be used as the dedicated frame. When mounted, even if the opening/closing frame 50 is to be closed, the convex portion comes into contact with the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 and cannot be closed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to play the game.

As described above, when the game board 2 is mounted on the non-regular game machine frame 3, by making the open/close frame 50 unable to be closed or the like to make it difficult to play the game, the non-regular game By allowing the player to play the game while the board 2 is still attached, it is possible to prevent the electronic components of the game frame from being defective.

Further, in the above description, the game board 2 has been illustrated as being mountable on both the dedicated frame and the common frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is mounted on an irregular game frame. It is not possible, that is, the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame can be mounted only on the dedicated frame, and the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame may be mounted only on the common frame.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the exclusive frame, the pachinko gaming machine 1A provided with the window portion 51 protruding forward is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. The window 51 may not project forward like the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine which is an example of a game machine, the game board 2 is used as the first mechanism body, and the opening/closing frame is used as the second mechanism body to which the first mechanism body is detachable. Although a mode in which a game frame including the gaming machine frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is another example of a gaming machine. Uses a variable display unit having a visual recognition area where a variable display device such as a reel can be visually recognized and provided with an effect control board as a first mechanism body, and a main body part to which the variable display unit is attachable and detachable is a second mechanism body. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which two types of game frames, that is, a special frame and a common frame, are described as the type of the game frame is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special frame is provided. It may have a plurality of types of dedicated frames such as a dedicated frame and a second dedicated frame, or a common frame may have a plurality of types of common frames such as a first common frame and a second common frame. Good. That is, there may be three or more types of game frames. Further, a plurality of types of game frames may be classified not only as a special frame and a common frame, but also simply as a decoration (color variation) or a movable body to be mounted, that is, different types of detection means, or the like. It may be a classification such as a version and a new version. That is, the plurality of types of game frames means the number of a plurality of detection units for detecting the state of the game frame (for example, the state of a movable body or an operating unit to be mounted, the state of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.). Different ones and ones having different designs or operation modes of the detection object of one of the plurality of detecting means are included.

More specifically, the variable display unit includes an upper panel having a visible area, which is capable of closing the upper part of the front opening of the housing, a reel, and a production control board, and the main body includes a housing having an open front surface. From the lower panel that closes the lower part of the front opening of the housing and is provided with operation means related to the progress of the game, which is commonly used by a plurality of models, such as a start switch, a stop switch, a medal insertion part, and a credit switch. It only needs to be configured. By doing so, the variable display unit can be attached to and detached from a plurality of types of main body including a dedicated body used only for a specific model and a common body commonly used by a plurality of models. it can.

Next, the window unit 51A forming the window 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27. 22A is a front view showing the window unit, and FIG. 22B is a rear view showing the window unit. 23A is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is seen from diagonally front, and FIG. 23B is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is seen from diagonally rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the window unit viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the window unit viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the tubular portion. FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structures of the opening/closing frame and the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the window unit 51A is arranged on the first transmission body 250 and on the game area 10 side of the first transmission body 250, and at a position corresponding to the opening 2c of the board 200. A second transparent body 260 having a hole 270 formed therein.

The first transmissive body 250 includes a plate-shaped portion made of a front transmissive plate 251 made of a transparent glass material, a first tubular body 252 and a second tubular body formed in a tubular shape by a non-translucent synthetic resin material. And a tubular portion made of a body 253. The second tubular body 253 is provided inside the first tubular body 252 so that it can be fitted from the opening on the back side, and the openings on the front sides of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are pre-permeated. It is formed slightly smaller than the plate 251, and the front transmission plate 251 is inserted from the opening on the back side of the first tubular body 252, and the second tubular body 253 is fitted from the rear side of the front transmission plate 251. The peripheral edge of the transmission plate 251 is sandwiched between the front peripheral edges of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253.

The first tubular body 252 has a tubular portion and a plate-shaped flange portion 256 formed so as to spread from the rear peripheral edge portion of the opening of the tubular portion. The outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated and reinforced by plating.

The second tubular body 253 has a plurality of mounting holes formed in the rear edge portion of the opening on the rear side, and a plurality of screws N1 are attached to the rear peripheral edge portion of the opening of the first tubular body 252. By being screwed into the hole, it is integrated with the first tubular body 252 to form a tubular portion, and is sandwiched by the opening peripheral portions on the front sides of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253. The front transmission plate 251 is also integrated to form the first transmission body 250. The peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251 and the peripheral edges of the front openings of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are joined together with an adhesive or the like.

The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed such that the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is longer than the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. As shown in FIG. 5, the front transmissive plate 251 has a substantially triangular shape in a vertical cross section, and is disposed so as to incline rearward downward, that is, the upper end thereof inclines forward.

The above-described upper plate 90 is provided below the window 51. Since the upper plate 90 is open on the upper side and a game ball for playing a game can be inserted, if the first transparent body 250 projects above the upper plate 90, it will be an obstacle to the insertion of the game ball. I will end up. In addition, the first transparent body 250 is provided so as to project forward of a member forming the upper plate 90. Therefore, the front transmission plate 251 is arranged such that the upper end thereof is located in front of the front end of the member forming the upper plate 90, and the lower end thereof is located behind the upper plate 90. It is arranged so as to be inclined.

In the present embodiment, the tubular portion formed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 has the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion extremely shorter than the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion may be substantially the same, or the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion may be the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. It may be shorter than the size. Further, it may not be a cylindrical portion provided along the entire peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251, but may be an arched portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, at a plurality of circumferential positions of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, there are convex strips 254A and concave strips 254B extending in the front-rear direction. The reinforcing structure portion 254 is formed. Further, in order to form a screw hole for the screw N1 in the first cylindrical body 252, a ridge portion 255A formed on the inner peripheral surface, and an inner hole for forming a mounting hole for the screw N1 in the second cylindrical body 253. The ridge portion 255A formed on the peripheral surface and the concave portion 255B formed on the outer peripheral surface also function as the reinforcing structure portion 254. By forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of positions in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 in this manner, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion, and the strength is improved. To do.

Further, the decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion by the uneven portion and the plating process applied to the outer peripheral surface as described above. In the present embodiment, the decorative portion is provided by the reinforcing uneven portion and the plating process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral surface may be colored or a pattern may be provided. You may comprise a decoration part.

The second transmissive body 260 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as a transparent acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a methacrylic resin, and has a plate-shaped portion formed of the rear transmissive plate 261 in which the holes 270 are formed, and a non-transparent material. And a frame body 262 formed in a frame shape from a light synthetic resin material. The rear transmission plate 261 is fixed to the back surface of the frame body 262 with an adhesive or the like so as to close the opening 262A of the frame body 262.

The first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 configured as described above are configured such that the screws N2 mounted from the front side into the plurality of mounting holes formed in the flange portion 256 of the first tubular body 252 are attached to the frame body 262. The one window unit 51A is formed by being screwed into the screw hole formed in the above to be integrated. As shown in FIG. 3, the window unit 51A is attached to the rear side of the opening/closing frame 50 at the open position for opening the gaming machine frame 3 so as to close the opening (not shown) of the opening/closing frame 50. ..

The window unit 51A is attachable to and detachable from the open/close frame 50, and can be replaced according to a model change or the like. Specifically, with the locking pin protruding on the back surface of the opening/closing frame 50 inserted into the locking hole formed in the frame body 262, the locking hook provided in the frame body 262 serves as the locking pin. It is attached by locking.

When the opening/closing frame 50 is rotated from the open position to the closed position to close the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 with the window unit 51A attached to the rear surface of the opening/closing frame 50, as shown in FIG. A plate 261 is arranged in front of the board surface plate 200 of the game board 2 substantially in parallel with the board surface plate 200 with a predetermined gap, and a game ball can flow down between the board surface plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. A game area 10 is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the rear transmission plate 261 is the entire game area 10 surrounded by the guide rails 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board 200 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front (player side). The hole portion 270 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board 200, while being arranged so as to cover the front surface of the board.

In the present embodiment, the game area 10 is an area in which the game balls can flow down, that is, an area other than the opening 2c in the area surrounded by the guide rails 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board 200, and an opening 2c. A corresponding area, that is, an area where the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y and various movable bodies described later are provided so that they can be visually recognized by the player (areas indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 26). Further, the center decoration frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c, so that the game ball is prevented from flowing into the opening 2c.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the hole portion 270 has a shape different from that of the opening 2c formed in the face plate 200 and a small size, and is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c. The invention is not limited to this, and may be formed to have substantially the same shape as the hole portion 270, or a part thereof may be located outside the opening 2c.

Therefore, the gaming area 10 configured in this way is seen through from the player side in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 forming the window 51. This is possible (see the window portion 51 shown by the meshed area in FIG. 22A). As shown in FIG. 27, the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A are installed in a standing state so as to be parallel to each other, while the front transmission plate 251 is gradually inclined from the upper side to the lower side toward the rear side. As described above, since the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged in a tilted posture inclining to the rear transmission plate 261, the separation distance L2 below the separation distance L1 above the rear transmission plate 261 is shorter than the separation distance L1. ing.

The first transmissive body 250 including the front transmissive plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion is the rear transmissive body forming the second transmissive body 260. It is formed in a convex shape projecting forward with respect to the plate 261, and in the state where the window unit 51A is attached to the opening/closing frame 50, a tubular portion formed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, It is provided so as to be inserted into the opening of the opening/closing frame 50 from the back side and project forward.

Therefore, the rear transmission plate 261 forming the game area 10 together with the game board surface 200A is accommodated within the plate thickness dimension of the opening/closing frame 50 in the front-rear direction, while the tubular portion is provided so as to project forward with respect to the front surface of the opening/closing frame 50. Thus, the front transmission plate 251 can be arranged as far away as possible from the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the front-rear dimension of the opening/closing frame 50. Thereby, a wide space S can be formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, the upper wall portions of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed so as to incline downward toward the front, and external light from the front upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is directed to the game area 10. Since it is difficult to enter, the front of the upper portion of the game area 10 is hidden by the upper wall portion, but since the player's line of sight is located below the upper wall portion, it is visible when looking up.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a magnet is pressed against the front transmission plate 251 to cause a magnetic sensor to malfunction, thereby causing an illegal prize to be generated, or a game ball flowing down in the game area 10 to be magnetized. Although a fraudulent act such as illegally guiding may be performed, by increasing the distances L1 and L2 between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the thickness of the rear transmission plate 261. Since the front transmission plate 251 can be moved away from the game area 10 as much as possible to reduce the influence of the magnetic force of the magnets, it is possible to preferably suppress fraudulent acts by the magnets. Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a magnet sensor for detecting an illegal magnetism, by increasing the distance between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 in a range that cannot be detected by the magnet sensor, the above-mentioned misconduct can be prevented. It is possible to suppress it suitably, and it is possible to reduce the number of arranged magnet sensors.

Next, a movable body unit having the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R will be described based on FIGS. 28 to 36. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the operation standby mode is seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the first operation mode is seen from diagonally front. FIG. 30: is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of 2nd operation form from diagonally front. FIG. 31 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the operation standby mode as seen from the front. FIG. 32 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the first operation mode as seen from the front. FIG. 33 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the second operation mode as seen from the front. FIG. 34 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the operation standby mode as seen from the side surface. FIG. 35 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the first operation mode as seen from the side surface. FIG. 36 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the second operation mode as seen from the side surface.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various effects related to the game such as effect symbol variable display control and notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been done.

As the notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a big hit notice effect indicating the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice indicating whether or not a reach is reached, and a stop symbol. Multiple notices to be executed at the start of fluctuation display or when the reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to give a notice, a latent notice to give a notice as to whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is latent) Including.

In the present embodiment, movable body effects by the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, which will be described below, and the movable body and the speaker 8L, Various effects such as composite effects by 8R and effect LED 9 and the like, and operation effects executed on the condition that the player operates the operation means such as the stick controller 31A can be executed as various notices.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the movable body unit is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y provided on the back side of the game board 2, and the effect display devices 5A, 5X. , 5Y, a base member 700 fixed to the back cover 70, and a first movable body 300, a second movable body 400, third movable bodies 500L, 500R and 4 movable bodies 600L and 600R. The base member 700 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by an upper side portion, a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower side portion, and each upper side portion, the left side portion, the right side portion, and the lower side portion are the respective display screens of the effect display device 5A. The display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X and 5Y are arranged along the sides so that the display screens can be visually recognized through the central opening. This movable body unit can be changed into an operation standby mode, a first operation mode, and a second operation mode as described later.

The first movable body 300 has a slide plate 301 attached movably in the front-rear direction along a rail 701 extending obliquely downward from the upper side of the base member 700, and a rotary shaft 305 at the tip of the slide plate 301. Body 302 rotatably and rotatably supported, first protrusion 303 and second protrusion 304 attached to the body 302 so as to be capable of projecting and accommodating, first drive mechanism 310, second drive mechanism 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a fourth drive mechanism 340 (see FIG. 2).

The first movable body 300 is a first standby position which is an origin position arranged on the upper side of the game board 2 by a first drive mechanism 310 including a first drive motor 311 and gears (see FIGS. 31 and 34). , And a first effect position (see FIG. 32 and FIG. 35) arranged on the center side of the game board 2, and can be moved along the rail 701. The first drive mechanism 310 includes a first standby position sensor and a first effect position sensor that detect the position of the first movable body 300.

Since the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is attached so as to be movable in the front-rear direction along the rail 701 of the base member 700, the first movable body 300 includes the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. You can accelerate and advance during the period. That is, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700 constitute acceleration advancing means. Further, in order to further enhance the accelerating property, a material or a shape having a lower sliding resistance between the slide plate 301 and the rail 701 may be used. In addition, lubricating oil or the like may be applied to further reduce the sliding resistance. Moreover, you may make it equip with the acceleration assistance means (for example, spring member etc.) which is not shown in figure which assists the acceleration of the 1st movable body 300. For example, the acceleration of the first movable body 300 can be assisted by the spring force that tries to return to the natural length from the urging state in which the spring member is contracted from the natural length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

The main body 302 has a substantially hexahedral shape, and is fixed to a rotary shaft 305 that faces the left-right direction. Hereinafter, in the main body 302, the surface facing the front in the normal state (operation standby mode) will be described as surface A, and the surface facing upward will be described as surface B.

The rotation shaft 305 is rotated by a second drive mechanism 320 including a second drive motor and gears (not shown), and the surface A of the main body 302 faces the front and the surface B faces upward. In the motion standby state (see FIGS. 31 and 34 ), the first rotation state (see FIGS. 32 and 35) in which the surface A faces diagonally forward and upward and the surface B faces rearward, and the surface A diagonally forward. The rotation state of the main body portion 302 can be switched between a second rotation state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) in which the surface B faces downward and the surface B faces diagonally forward and upward. The second drive mechanism 320 includes a rotation standby position sensor that detects the rotation state of the first movable body 300, a first rotation position sensor, and a second rotation position sensor.

The first projecting portion 303 is housed in the main body portion 302 by the third driving mechanism 330 including a third driving motor 331 and gears and racks (not shown), etc. (FIG. 31, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, FIG. 36) and a first protruding state (see FIGS. 32 and 35) that projects outward from the surface A of the main body 302. In the first storage state, the entire first projecting portion 303 is stored in the main body portion 302 so as not to project outside from the main body portion 302. The third drive mechanism 330 includes a first protrusion position sensor and a first storage position sensor that detect the state of the first protrusion 303.

The second projecting portion 304 is partially housed in the main body 302 by the fourth driving mechanism 340 including a fourth driving motor 341 and gears and racks (not shown), etc. (FIGS. 31, 32 and 34). , FIG. 35) and a second projecting state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) projecting outward from the surface B of the main body 302. In the second stored state, a part of the first projecting portion 303 projects further outward than the surface B of the main body portion 302, but the back surface of the surface B in the rotation standby state or the first rotation state. Since it is located on the side, it is inconspicuous from the player (front side). The fourth drive mechanism 340 includes a second protrusion position sensor and a second storage position sensor that detect the state of the second protrusion 304.

The second movable body 400 is attached to the lower side of the base member 700, and is arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 by a fifth drive mechanism 410 including a fifth drive motor, a gear, a rack, etc. (not shown). 2 Vertical movement between the standby position (see FIGS. 31, 33 and 34, 36) and the second effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 35) arranged on the center side of the game board 2 It is possible. The 2nd movable body 400 inclines so that an upper end may incline to the front side in the 2nd production position. The fifth drive mechanism 410 includes a second standby position sensor and a second effect position sensor that detect the position of the second movable body 400.

The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are attached to the left and right sides of the lower side of the base member 700, and are driven by the sixth drive motors 511L and 511R and the sixth drive mechanisms 510L and 510R including unillustrated rotating arms and gears. , A third standby position (see FIG. 31, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, FIG. 36) arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 and a third effect position (FIG. 32 and FIG. 32) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. 35), and can be moved in the vertical direction. Specifically, the rotating arm is configured to rotate about a shaft (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, and each of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R has a second standby position at a second standby position. The movable body 400 is arranged at a position separated from both left and right sides, and is arranged at a position close to both left and right sides of the second movable body 400 in the second effect position in the third effect position. The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are inclined such that the upper ends thereof fall forward in the third effect position. The sixth drive mechanisms 510L and 510R include third standby position sensors and third effect position sensors that detect the positions of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R.

The fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are attached to the left and right sides of the upper side of the base member 700, and the seventh drive mechanism 610L and 610R including a seventh drive motor, gears, racks and the like (not shown) cause the game board 2 to move. It is possible to move vertically between a fourth standby position (see FIGS. 31 and 32) arranged on the upper side and a fourth effect position (see FIG. 33) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. Has become. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are configured to move from the left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700 toward the central portion so as to approach each other. In the fourth standby position, the first movable body 300 is arranged at a position apart from the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 in the first standby position, and in the fourth effect position, in a position close to the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 in the first effect position. Will be placed. The seventh drive mechanisms 610L and 610R include fourth standby position sensors and fourth effect position sensors that detect the positions of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first standby position (origin position), the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L. , 500R are arranged at the third standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R are arranged at the fourth standby position. The first movable body 300 is in the rotation standby state, and the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion The section 304 is in the first storage state and the second storage state. At this time, since each movable body is arranged on the peripheral side of the opening 2c of the game board 2, the player (front side) can visually recognize the display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y ( See FIG. 31). For example, as shown in FIG. 1, it can be said that the first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is a position where the first movable body 300 does not overlap the effect display device 5A. The first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is not limited to this, and may be a position where the first movable body 300 overlaps a part of the effect display device 5A, for example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 34, only a part of the front surface side of the first movable body 300 at the first standby position (origin position) is slightly passed through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 and is slightly moved to the first transmission body. Although it has entered between 250 and the second transparent body 260, it may not enter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second effect position, and the third movable object 500L, 500R is arranged in the third effect position and fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R are arranged in the fourth standby position. The first movable body 300 is in the first rotation state, and the first projecting portion 303 is in the first position. The projecting state and the second projecting portion 304 are in the second stored state. At this time, the 1st movable body 300, the 2nd movable body 400, the 3rd movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the 1st protrusion part 303 are arrange|positioned at the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and form a predetermined shape. The objects are brought into contact with each other or come close to each other to form an object (see FIG. 32). That is, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 can perform control to move the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R so that they can be combined with the first movable body 300.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, the third movable body 500L, 500R is arranged at the third standby position, and fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth effect position. The first movable body 300 is in the second rotation state, and the first protruding portion 303 is the first The second projecting portion 304 is in the stored state and the second projecting portion 304 is in the second projecting state. At this time, the 1st movable body 300, the 4th movable body 600L, 600R, and the 2nd protrusion part 304 are arrange|positioned at the front surface side of production|presentation display apparatus 5A, 5X, 5Y, and the structure of a shape different from a 1st operation form is formed. As a result, they are brought into contact with each other or brought close to each other to be united (see FIG. 33). That is, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 can perform control to move the first movable body 300 so that the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R can be combined.

In addition, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first operation mode, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode. When combined with, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 (FIG. 35). , FIG. 36).

Therefore, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined, the moving direction of the first movable body 300 in the first control, In other words, since they are located at different positions in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be produced.

Next, an example of operation control of the movable body unit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of each movable body and the effect LED in the movable body production.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 34, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, in the first movable body 300, a part of the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is rearward at the first standby position. It is located on the front transmission plate 251 side, that is, on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261 (in particular, see the solid line portions in FIGS. 31 and 34).

In the movable-body effect according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 establishes a condition for starting the movable-object effect (for example, operating means during execution of the movable effect (for example, effect button or stick). When the operation of the operation means is detected during the operation acceptance period of the controller 31A or the like, or when the operation valid period ends and the execution timing of the movable body is reached), the first movable body 300, the second movable body. 400, 3rd movable body 500L, 500R is operated. The effect LED 9 produces a light emission effect in the first light emission mode.

Specifically, the first movable body 300 is moved diagonally downward from the first standby position toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). As shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 31 and 34, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is rearward. It is positioned closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261, and the main body 302 is disposed to the front side of the first standby position. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302 on the surface A side (front side) of the first movable body 300 in the first standby position via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the first control of moving the front transmission plate 251 toward the front transmission plate 251 side rather than the rear transmission plate 261. Further, the second movable body 400 moves toward the second effect position, and the third movable objects 500L and 500R move toward the third effect position.

When the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move to predetermined positions, they are detected by a first effect position sensor, a second effect position sensor, and a third effect position sensor (not shown), Based on the fact that the first effect position sensor, the second effect position sensor, and the third effect position sensor detect each movable body, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first movable body 300 to be in the first rotation state. The rotating shaft 305 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view (first rotation, see arrow 2 in FIGS. 32 and 35). The effect control CPU 120 stops the first rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the first rotation position sensor. At this time, the front end sides of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are tilted forward (see arrow 3 in FIGS. 32 and 35), and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable body The movable bodies 500L and 500R are united. Even when rotating, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is positioned closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the second light emission mode, and causes the surface A of the main body 302 to be detected by the third drive mechanism 330 until the first projecting portion 303 is detected by the first projecting position sensor. To the outside, and is in the first protruding state. As described above, when the first movable body 300 is in the first rotation state, since the surface A of the main body 302 faces obliquely forward and upward, the first projecting portion 303 projects obliquely forward and upward. (See arrow 4 in FIGS. 32 and 35). That is, the first protruding portion 303 moves in a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the main body 302 (obliquely downward direction). That is, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control for moving in the direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction). By executing the first control and the second control, the movable body unit changes to the first operation mode.

As described above, in the first movable body 300, after the main body 302 is moved obliquely forward and downward, the first protrusion 303 is formed in the space S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since it projects obliquely upward and upward, the moving operation of the first projecting portion 303 can be favorably shown without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. Further, even when changing to the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the front transmission plate 251 is not contacted.

In the first operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body 302 is located in the space S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state, As shown in FIG. 32, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first projecting portion 303 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 is expanded. Then, since the first movable body 300 appears to be enlarged, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the first projecting portion 303 is changed to the first projecting state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the first projecting portion 303 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the game ball does not stick out toward the game area 10 side, the first projecting portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball.

In the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the first projecting portion 303 constitute a structure having a predetermined shape. To do. Specifically, the second movable body 400 is arranged below the first movable body 300 so as to come into contact with or come close to it, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R come into contact with the left and right of the first movable body 300, respectively. Since the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R serve as support means for the first movable body 300 and support each other by being arranged close to each other, the projecting operation of the first projecting portion 303 is performed. Also, the swinging of the first movable body 300 after the projecting operation is suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L, 500R are arranged closer to the game area 10 (back side) than the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300. , It is possible to give a sense of depth to the structure configured by being united.

In addition, since the luminance of the second light emission mode of the effect LED 9 is lower than that of the first light emission mode, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode (during the second control), the light of each of the effect LEDs 9 is changed. It is possible to suppress deterioration of visibility of the movable body.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first projecting portion 303 until the first storage position sensor detects the first projecting portion 303 based on the state that the movable body unit is in the first operation mode for a predetermined time. The first movable body 400 is moved to the second standby position and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are moved to the third standby position until the second standby position sensor and the third standby position sensor detect the second movable body 400. (See arrow 5 in FIGS. 33 and 36). Next, after the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R reach the position where they do not interfere with the rotating operation of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 is rotated so as to be in the second rotating state. The drive shaft 305 is rotated clockwise in the right side view (second rotation, see arrow 6 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the effect LED 9 is caused to emit light in the third light emission mode. The effect control CPU 120 stops the second rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the second rotation position sensor.

Then, the second projecting portion 304 is projected until it is detected by the second projecting position sensor to be in the second projecting state (see the arrow 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are also constructed as described above. It moves toward the fourth effect position until it is detected by the fourth effect position sensor (see arrow 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36). That is, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second projecting portion 304, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, to be in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control for moving in the direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction). By executing the first control and the second control, the movable body unit changes to the second operation mode. At this time, the effect LED 9 is caused to emit light in the fourth light emission mode.

Further, in the second operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body 302 is located in the space S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the second protruding portion 304 is changed to the second protruding state, As shown in FIG. 33, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second projecting portion 304 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 expands. Then, since the first movable body 300 appears to be enlarged, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the second projecting portion 304 is changed to the second projecting state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the second projecting portion 304 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it does not protrude outside the region where the game sphere flows, that is, it does not stick out to the flow-down region of the game ball, the first protrusion 303 does not hinder the visual recognition of the game ball.

In the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, and the second protrusion 304 are combined so as to form a structure having a shape different from that of the first operation mode. To do. More specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 so that the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R come into contact with or come close to each other, so that the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are supported by the first movable body 300. Therefore, since they support each other, the projecting operation of the second projecting portion 304, the swinging of the first movable body 300 after the projecting operation, and the like are suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged closer to the game area 10 (rear side) than the rear transmission plate 261 when they are combined with the first movable body 300, and thus are configured to be combined. A sense of depth can be created in the structure (see FIG. 30).

In addition, since the luminance of the fourth light emission mode of the effect LED 9 is lower than that of the first light emission mode and the third light emission mode, when the movable body unit is in the second operation mode (during the second control), It is possible to prevent the visibility of each movable body from being reduced by the light of the LED 9.

When the production operation by each movable body is completed when the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the production control CPU 120 moves the second projecting portion 304 until it is detected by the second storage position sensor. To the second stored state, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are moved to the fourth standby position until they are detected by the first standby position sensor and the fourth standby position sensor. Move toward (storing operation). At this time, the effect LED 9 is caused to emit light in the fifth light emission mode. When the first movable body 300 moves to the first standby position and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the fourth standby position, the movable body effect by the movable body unit is completed.

The first to fifth light emitting modes by the effect LED 9 may be different modes depending on various operating modes of the movable body. The light emission mode includes, for example, a color to be emitted, brightness, lighting or blinking, blinking speed, and the like.

Next, a production effect in the light emission production by the production LED 9 and the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38: (A) is the schematic which looked at the light emission aspect of production LED and movable body LED from the side, (B) is the schematic which looked at the light emission aspect of production LED and movable body LED from above. ..

As shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, the effect LEDs 9 arranged around the first transmissive body 250 on the front surface of the opening/closing frame 50 irradiate the first transmissive body 250 with light, Since the outer peripheral surface of the first transmissive body 250 (first cylindrical body 252) is plated, the light from the effect LED 9 is prevented from being reflected and entering the first transmissive body 250. ing. Further, ambient light R other than the light from the effect LED 9 (for example, light such as indoor light of a game store or light from an adjacent game machine) is also prevented from entering the first transparent body 250 in the same manner. Has become.

That is, it is possible to prevent the visibility of each movable body and the game area 10 from being lowered, and to prevent the light emission effect of the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR from being affected. In addition, by irradiating the periphery of the first transparent body 250, it is possible to make the surroundings of each movable body stand out, and not only the player playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also the surroundings. The production can be appealed.

The movable body LEDs include a movable body LED 350A attached to the main body 302 facing the front side (player side), a movable body LED 350B attached to the second protrusion 304, and movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR facing the side surface side. Each of the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR that directs light toward the back side (game area 10 side) is composed of (light emitting means). The light to the front side by the movable body LEDs 350A and 350B is irradiated to the front side through the front transmission plate 251, and the light to the back side by the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR is the game area 10 (a game ball flowing down the game area 10, It is designed to illuminate the winning openings and guideways. The light to the side surface side of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is emitted toward the first transmissive body 250, but the inner peripheral surface of the first transmissive body 250 (second cylindrical body 253) is plated. Since the light is applied, the lights of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR are reflected to the front side. That is, it is possible to collect light to the front side to enhance the effect of the effect, and it is possible to prevent the light effect of the effect LED 9 from being affected.

Next, an example of the display device effects in the effect display devices 5X and 5Y will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39: (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the standby state which shows a normal state of an effect display device, (B) is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st operation state of an effect display device, (C) is the 2nd of an effect display device. It is a schematic diagram showing an operating state.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), in the normal state of the effect display device, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are in a standby state in which they are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A. In this standby state, the standby state is arranged such that the display portion is slightly inclined so as to face the center side.

In addition, above and below the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, rail members (guide means) (not shown) for guiding the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are respectively arranged. The rail member is composed of a portion that extends in the front-rear direction at a position on the front surface side of the effect display device 5A and a portion that extends in a direction that separates left and right from both ends of the front-rear part. Is attached to the rail member so as to be rotatable about a vertical rotation shaft. In this way, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided so as to be movable and rotatable by the display device drive mechanism 900 including a rail member, a drive motor, and the like (not shown).

When the predetermined start condition for the display device effect is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so as to approach the position on the front side of the effect display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 39(B). After that, the rear display plate 261 is moved from the position on the rear surface side to the position on the front surface side through the hole 270 to change the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the first operation state. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in the standby state at the position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261 and the predetermined portions of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the third control for moving the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261.

The effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 side than the rear transmission plate 261 with the display portions slightly tilted so as to face the center side, so that the display portions can be easily viewed by the player. While the state is maintained, the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be shown appropriately.

When the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261, the effect control CPU 120 separates the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from each other, as shown in FIG. 39(C). The display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are rotated by a rotation motor (not shown) so as to face outward in the left-right direction. That is, after performing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fourth control in which the CPU 120 is moved in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the movement direction (front-back direction) in the third control. By performing the third control and the fourth control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y change to the second operation state.

In addition, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y face outward in the left-right direction in the second operation state, the display content of the display units can be viewed by anyone other than the player. The rail members that guide the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y change the effect display devices 5X and 5X when the standby state changes to the first operation state and when the first operation state changes to the second operation state. Since it functions as a contact prevention unit that prevents contact between the 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X, 5Y or the rear transmission plate 261 from being damaged.

Next, the relationship between the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the open/close frame is opened in the second operation mode of the movable body unit.

As shown in FIG. 40, the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 is formed larger than the first movable body 300. More specifically, when the opening/closing frame 50 is opened/closed, the hole portion 270 is also rotated around the hinge portion (rotation shaft in the vertical direction) of the opening/closing frame 50. The first movable body 300 in the second operation mode of the movable body unit is the most protruding movable body in each operation mode of the movable body unit, and is the front portion of the first movable body 300 (the closed state of the opening/closing frame 50). In (), the portion located on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the hole 270) is arranged within the rotation region Z of the hole 270.

Therefore, even if the opening/closing frame 50 is opened/closed, the rear transmission plate 261 does not contact the first movable body 300. According to this, for example, when an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, and it is necessary to open the open/close frame 50 and perform maintenance. Even if there is, since the opening/closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

(Progress of games and production)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. When the player rotationally operates the hit ball operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is shot toward the game area 10. Based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed through the game area 10 has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the predetermined time, which is the universal symbol fluctuation time, elapses, and if the regular symbols other than the regular symbol are stopped and displayed, the variation display result of the regular symbol is "out of regular symbol". Become. If a specific ordinary symbol (normal symbol per symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "universal symbol", and the opening control for retracting the movable plate of the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B from the game area 10 is performed. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the normal opening control is performed to return to the closed position protruding into the game area 10. When the general-purpose game cannot be started, for example, during the opening control described below in which another general-purpose game is already being executed, the execution of the general-purpose game is suspended with an upper limit of four. The suspended general-university game starts when it becomes ready to start.

Based on that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, after the first start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the first start winning opening or the like, and for example, the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state is ended. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, after the second starting condition is established by the game ball winning the second starting winning opening, the second starting condition is established by, for example, ending the previous special drawing game or the jackpot gaming state. Based on this, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In addition, when the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied) such as when another special figure game has already been executed or is controlled to the jackpot gaming state described later, four etc. Execution of the special figure game is suspended up to. The reserved special figure game is executed when the start condition is satisfied.

In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the fixed special symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (a big symbol symbol, for example, a special symbol such as “3” or “7”) is stopped and displayed, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (miss). If a symbol (for example, a special figure such as "-") is stopped and displayed, "off" occurs. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. The big hit game state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variation display result in the special figure game is "miss", the big hit game state is not controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening device 7 has a special winning opening door for a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. The special winning opening is opened in the period until the occurrence of. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed.

The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the big winning a prize, the big prize award door which opened the big prize award during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, is repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "16") (the special winning opening is closed in a period other than the round game).

In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5A, the variable display of effect symbols is started in response to the start of the special figure game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display, the variable display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state. With the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y form part of the jackpot combination, the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed are It is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the effect symbols are changing in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination.

In the embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As reach productions, normal reach, super reach A (developing from normal reach), and super reach B (developing from normal reach) having different production modes are prepared. In the embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B>super reach A>normal reach (normal reach that does not develop into super reach). The big hit expectation degree is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and here is also a ratio at which the display result of the variable display of effect symbols is “big hit”.

When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a predetermined big hit combination is obtained as a display result of the variable display of effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. The fixed effect design is derived and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the effect design is "big hit"). As an example, the same effect symbol on a predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” (for example, “7” when the probability variable jackpot is large, non-probability variable jackpot) At the time of, "6" and the like) are all displayed together and stopped. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41B, which will be described later, “non-probable variation” includes an uncertain variation jackpot in which promotion effect (failure) is executed during a jackpot, and an uncertain variation jackpot in which promotion effect itself is not performed. There are two types of “probable variation”, a probable variation jackpot in which promotion effect (success) is executed during a jackpot and a probable variation jackpot in which promotion effect itself is not performed. The promotion effect is a probability variation promotion effect, and is an effect that is executed in a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds) during the big hit and displays that the promotion to the probability variation big hit has succeeded or failed. When the jackpot type is "non-probable change (promotion production failure)", the same production symbol "6" is stopped and displayed together, and the probable variation promotion production (failure) is executed in 7 rounds during the jackpot. When the jackpot type is "probable variation (successful production success)", the same production symbol "6" is displayed together as a stop, and the probable variation promotion production (success) is executed in the seventh round during the big hit. The probability variation promotion effect may be executed in a round other than 7 rounds or a plurality of rounds, or may be executed in a fanfare effect, an ending effect, or the like. Further, the promotion effect may be a round promotion effect for notifying the continuation of the round.

When the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the effect design is not the reach mode, and the fixed effect design of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect pattern. Alternatively, after the variable display mode of the effect design becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the effect pattern, the fixed effect pattern of a predetermined reach combination (reach-miss combination) which is not the jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special drawing game, a fixed production symbol which is a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also called “non-probable variation jackpot combination”) among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “non-determined jackpot”. When it becomes ", it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after that, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In addition, in the time saving control, the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased, and the winning frequency to the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased, that is, so-called electric chow support is implemented. Therefore, the state in which the time saving control is performed (time saving state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the time saving control, one of a condition that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that the variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes you just need to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations, a fixed production symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination (also called "probability variation jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "probability variation jackpot". When it becomes, the big hit game state is controlled, and after that, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special drawing game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the state in which the probability variation control is performed (the probability variation state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Probability change control, when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state again after the big hit game state ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the number of time saving and shortening) after the big hit game state ends. When the special figure game of (2 times) is executed, it is determined that “there is a certain probability variation fall” that ends the certainty variation control in the probability variation fall lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state. When, etc. may be finished.

When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the universal figure game (general figure variation time) than in the normal state, and the variation display result of the regular symbol in each regular figure game are The control for improving the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, the movement control time for performing the movement control of the movable plate in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "universal figure hit" is usually There is a possibility that the game ball easily passes through (enters) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of times it moves, so that the second start condition is satisfied. The control that is advantageous to the player by increasing the value (power control support, high opening control) is performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently, and the variable display result is “big hit” next. It takes less time.

The normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, a probability variation state, or the like that is advantageous to the player. The probability of being a "hit" and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game is a "big hit" is a predetermined reset process after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). Is not controlled) is controlled in the same way.

The time saving state is called "high base", the gaming state which is not the time saving state is "low base" "non-time saving state", and the probability change state is also called "high probability". The game state that is not the probability change state is also called "low probability" or "non-probability change". The gaming state when it is in the probability changing state and the time saving state is also referred to as "high accuracy high base". The gaming state when it is in the probability changing state but not in the time saving state is also referred to as "high accuracy low base". The gaming state when not in the probability changing state but in the time saving state is also referred to as "low accurate high base". The normal state is also referred to as "low accurate low base".

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like. In each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 11)
In the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter/timer circuit) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds), that is, at an interrupt request signal supply interval. It is executed every predetermined time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process repeatedly executes each timer interrupt. As a result, game control and the like are realized.

In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal has been input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is used in a special symbol process process or a normal symbol process process.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. The special symbol process process is a process for realizing the holding and execution of the special symbol game, the big hit game state, and the like, based on the determination result in the switch process. Ordinary symbol process process, based on the determination result in the switch process, such as hold or execution of the universal game, the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) open state, etc. This is a process for doing. The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Production control command set for transmission in special symbol process processing)
Next, the production control command which is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing and is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 in the command control processing will be described. FIG. 41A shows an example of main effect control commands. In addition, the following "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number.

Variation pattern designation command 81XX (H), display result designation command 8CXX (H), symbol determination designation command 8F00 (H), hit start designation command A000 (H), hit end designation command A300 (H), first start winning designation The command B100 (H), the second start winning award designation command B200 (H), and the special winning opening award designation command B300 (H) are prepared in advance. “XX” is EXT data. A numerical value corresponding to the variable display result is set to “XX” of the display result designation command 8CXX(H) (for example, as shown in FIG. 41(B), “00” if “miss”, “inaccurate change”). "01" for "big hit", "02" for "non-probable jackpot (promotion production failure)", "03" for "probable jackpot", "04" for "probable jackpot (promotion presentation success)".

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. Each flag, each counter, and each timer described below are provided in the RAM 102. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process (S101). For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the first starting opening switch 22A is on (whether it is determined to be on by the switch processing. The same applies to the other switches). When it is on, it is determined whether the number of the first special figure reservation storages has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4), and when it has not reached the upper limit number, it is determined that the first start winning is generated, and the random number circuit. 104 or random number values for games updated in the random number updating process for games, random number value MR1 for determining special figure display result (variable display result of special game), random number value MR2 for determining jackpot type, fluctuation pattern determination The random number MR3 for RAM is extracted, and the extracted numerical value is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 102 as the first reservation data. It is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on. If it is on, it is determined whether or not the number of the second special figure reservation storages has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4). Similarly, the random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted, and the extracted numerical values are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 102 as the second reservation data. The first hold data and the second hold data are held in the order of start winning. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number may be specified by the number of the first reserved data or the second reserved data or a counter that counts each stored number (hereinafter the same). In the starting winning determination process, when the first starting winning is made, the transmission setting of the first starting winning designation command and the addition specifying command of the first special figure reservation storage number is set, and when the second starting winning is made. The transmission setting of the second start winning award designation command and the second special figure reserved storage number addition designation command is performed.

After executing S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag. The time saving flag described below is a flag that is turned on in the time saving state, and the probability variation flag is a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state.

The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". For example, when the second special figure pending storage number is not "0", the CPU 103 performs processing for executing the second special figure game, updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1", and executes this processing. finish. When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" and the first special figure reservation storage number is not "0", processing for executing the first special figure game is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to "1". ", and the present process ends. When both are "0", this processing is ended.

In the process for executing the second special figure game, the oldest second reserved data among the second pending data (random number values MR1 to MR3) held in the second special figure pending storage unit is set as the second special figure pending. The data is read from the storage unit into a predetermined buffer of the RAM 102. The read second reserved data is deleted from the second special figure pending storage unit. Then, based on the random number value MR1 of the second reserved data read out to the predetermined buffer and the jackpot determination table (stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table below), the second special figure executed this time. The variable display result (“big hit” or “miss”) of the game is determined. The determination rate of “big hit” is higher in the probability variation state (when the probability variation flag is on) than in the non-probability variation state (when the probability variation flag is off). When the “big hit” is determined, the big hit type (“probable change” or “non-probable change”) is determined based on the random number value MR2 and the big hit type determination table. In the embodiment, any one of “non-probability change”, “non-probability change (promotion effect failure)”, “probability change”, and “probability change (promotion effect success)” is determined. The determination result and information indicating that the second special figure game is to be executed are held in the RAM 102 and appropriately referred to (the same applies to other determinations).

Also in the processing for executing the first special figure game, the same processing as the processing for executing the second special figure game is performed, the first reserved data is read into a predetermined buffer, and the first special figure game is changed. Determines the display results (including determining the jackpot type).

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". For example, the CPU 103 determines (selects) a variation pattern, and sets execution start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game. The variation pattern is for designating a variable display execution time (special figure variation time) and a variable display pattern of effect symbols.

In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2-PA3-4 as the variation patterns at the time of loss. There are B3-2-PB3-4 as the variation patterns at the time of big hit. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for time saving (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than normal (PA1-1). PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify execution of normal reach (no development to super reach), PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify execution of super reach A (development from normal reach), and PA3 -4 and PB3-4 specify execution of super reach B (which evolves from normal reach).

When the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, the CPU 103 PB3-2 based on the random number value MR3 of the first and second reserved data read in the predetermined buffer and the big hit variation pattern determination table. Any one of PB3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. When the variable display result is “miss” and in the non-time saving state (when the time saving flag is off), PA1-1 and PA3 are determined based on the random number value MR3 and the first loss variation pattern determination table. Any one of −2 to PA3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. When the variable display result is “miss” and when the time saving state is set (when the time saving flag is on), PA2-1 and PA3- based on the random number value MR3 and the second variation change pattern determination table. Any one of 2 to PA3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. The rate of determination of the variation pattern is high in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1>PA3-2>PA3-3>PA3-4 at the time of loss. At the time of a big hit, PB3-4>PB3-3>PB3-2 in order. For this reason, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of super reach B>super reach A>normal reach.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined, for example, the drive signal is started to be supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is started. A display result designation command, a designation command for subtracting the first or second special figure reserved storage number, a variation pattern designation command for designating the above determination result or the current game state (which can be identified by the state of the probability variation flag or the time saving flag) After making the transmission setting of, and setting the value of the special figure process flag to "2", this processing is ended.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". For example, the CPU 103 has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of this time, since the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game (may be measured by a timer or the like. The same applies to other elapsed times). It is determined (whether it is the timing of deriving the variable display result), and when it is not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. The present process is terminated after the process of supplying the special symbols to the display 4B and changing the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure variation time is reached, a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the symbol of the variable display result this time (in the case of "miss", " -", "7" in case of "probable variation big hit", "3" etc. in case of "non-probability variation big hit" are stopped and displayed (derived display), and transmission setting of the symbol confirmation designation command is set, and special figure process flag The value of is updated to "3". The special figure game is executed by repeatedly executing S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

The special symbol stop process of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". For example, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the probability variation flag to OFF when the variable display result this time is “big hit”. After that, the transmission of the hit start designation command is set, the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and the present process is terminated. When the time is "miss" and is in the time saving state, it is determined whether or not the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the time saving state (for example, a counter or the like may be used for counting), and the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. If so, the time saving flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "0", and the present process is terminated. Even when the variable display is not performed due to "miss" and the variable display is not executed a predetermined number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "0" and the present process is terminated.

The big hit opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". For example, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the transmission setting of the hit start designation command has reached the preset fanfare wait time (waiting time from the start of fanfare to the end in the big hit game state). If it has not reached, the big hit opening pretreatment is ended. When the fanfare wait time is reached, processing for opening the special winning opening (supply of solenoid drive signal) is performed to start the round game, and the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting for the start timing of the round game (waiting for the end of the fanfare) and opening of the special winning opening are realized.

The big hit opening process in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. The number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, "9") (it may be counted by a counter or the like), or after starting the round game ( If the elapsed time of (after opening the special winning opening) reaches the upper limit period of the round game (for example, 29 seconds), and it is time to end the round game, return the special winning opening to the closed state. A process for ending the round game (a process for turning off the solenoid 82) and the like are performed. At this time, when the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter or the like), a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is made, and the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7", and this processing ends. When it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and this processing is ended. If it is not the time to end the round game, the present process is ended as it is (a process for maintaining the special winning opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating S115 every time the timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening to the closed state, and finally the special winning opening is closed.

The post-big hit opening process of S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the special winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (interval period of the round game), and when not reached. , The closed state is maintained, and this processing ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, processing for opening the special winning opening is executed to start the round game, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and this processing is ended.

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the special winning opening is opened in S114.

The jackpot ending process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". For example, the elapsed time from the end of the last round game (after closing the special winning opening) is a predetermined ending waiting time (wait time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit game state) It is determined whether it has been reached, and if it has not been reached, this processing ends. When the ending waiting time is reached, the ending will end, so when the jackpot type this time is "probability variation", the time saving flag and the probability variation flag are turned on. Leave the flag off. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" and the present process is terminated.

(Operation of production control board 12)
FIG. 45(A) is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process. In the main processing, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S51). After that, the process proceeds to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the flag is cleared (S53) and the following processing is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis processing, which effect control command (see FIG. 3) is stored in the buffer area is analyzed, and settings and control corresponding to the analysis result are performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process processing, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes according to the control state, and the display and operation control of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are executed. .. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect random number updating processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating effect random numbers such as the jackpot symbol determination random number (S56).

Next, when the abnormality or the error has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notification control processing for executing the notification of the abnormality or the like (S57), and thereafter shifts to S52. As shown in FIG. 45(B), in the notification control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a door opening detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the open/close frame 50 is on (S61). For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting opening of the opening/closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11. The main board 11 transmits to the effect control board 12 a door-opening designation command indicating that the opening/closing frame 50 has been opened based on the fact that the opening of the opening/closing frame 50 is detected by the door opening detection switch. Therefore, when the door opening specifying command is received from the main board 11, it can be determined that the door opening detection switch is ON.

If the door open detection switch is on (S61; Yes), it is determined whether the first movable body 300 is in operation (S62). For example, if the first movable body 300 is at the origin position, it is determined that it is not operating, and if it is not at the origin position, it is determined that it is operating. If the first movable body 300 is in operation (S62; Yes), the door opening notification (first opening notification) during movement of the movable body is executed (S63). On the other hand, if the first movable body 300 is not in operation (S62; No), the normal door opening notification (second opening notification) is executed (S65). The door opening notification when the movable body operates is different from the normal door opening notification. For example, in the door opening notification when the movable body is operating, the notification sound is louder than the normal door opening notification or the notification image and the notification light emission are conspicuous. In addition, the door opening notification when the movable body is in operation displays a notification that the movable object is in motion (for example, a notification image of "moving object is moving!" or "watch moving object in motion!" The contents may be output as a voice, etc.), and the door opening notification at normal times may not have that effect.

In this way, the first opening notification can notify that the opening/closing frame 50 is open during the operation of the first movable body 300, and the opening/closing frame 50 can be opened while considering the first movable body 300 in operation. Can be dealt with. In addition, if it is the second opening notification, it can be notified that the opening/closing frame 50 is opened when the first movable body 300 is not operating, and the opening/closing frame 50 can be opened without worrying about the first movable body 300. can do. Therefore, when the opening/closing frame 50 is informed of the opening, it is possible to perform an appropriate treatment depending on whether or not the first movable body 300 is operating. It should be noted that the same notification may be given without distinguishing between the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body and the door opening notification during the normal operation.

After S63, the operation of the first movable body 300 is limited (S64). For example, the operation of the first movable body 300 is stopped. When the opening of the opening/closing frame 50 is detected during the operation of the first movable body 300, the operation of the first movable body 300 is limited, so that the damage of the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented. ..

As an example of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S64), control for moving the first movable body 300 to the standby position may be performed. According to this, for example, when the first control or the second control is executed in the movable body effect, an operation abnormality of the first movable body 300 occurs and the first movable body 300 is in the first effect position or the like. Even if it becomes necessary to open the open/close frame 50 for maintenance due to improper operation, ball clogging within the game area 10, etc. Since the movable body 300 retreats toward a position (for example, a standby position) that does not contact the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

Further, when the open/close frame 50 is opened, even if a game ball that has stayed in a beaded state due to a ball jam falls, the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 is controlled by the first control, that is, the front side of the game area 10. By retracting the moving first movable body 300 to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the first movable body 300, so that the first movable body 300 collides with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged or bouncing due to the collision with the first movable body 300 and entering the back side of the board 200 through the opening 2c of the board 200.

On the other hand, when the door open detection switch is not on (S61; No), the process ends after S64 or after S65.

(Command analysis process)
In the command analysis process, the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer (the effect control command received by the effect control board 12) is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and which effect control the received command is. Whether or not it is a command is specified, and processing according to the specified effect control command is performed.

FIG. 44 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis processing and the processing content performed in the command analysis processing corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the figure are provided in the RAM 122. “Set” for a flag means to turn the flag on. The state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area may be reset or erased at an appropriate timing. When a command for adding the special figure hold storage number or a command for specifying the subtraction of the special figure hold storage number is received, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5A is accordingly received. The number of images may be increased or decreased.

(Production control process processing)
The CPU 120 for effect control performs start setting for starting execution of various effects in the effect control process process (start setting of effect), effect operation control for executing the effect set for start, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter, and the like described below are provided in the RAM 122.

The effect start setting includes, for example, setting the effect control pattern in the RAM 122 as a use pattern, and setting the process timer to an initial value according to the effect control pattern set above. After the initial value is set, the timer value of the process timer is subtracted at a predetermined timing (at the start of effect control process processing, at the time of effect operation control described later, etc.) each time a timer interrupt occurs. The production control pattern is a collection of data for executing various productions (including variable display of production symbols), and is associated with a process timer determination value that is compared with the timer value of the process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process control data including generated effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lighting control data, etc.) and an end code. The data forming the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

The effect operation control is control for executing an effect based on the effect control pattern set in the effect start setting. Specifically, of the effect control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer, the display control command according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and effect display is performed. Effects displayed on the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, transmission of a drive control command according to drive control data to the display device drive mechanism 900 to drive the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, effects according to voice control data. A sound signal is transmitted to the voice control board 13 to output a voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, or an illumination signal according to the lighting control data is transmitted to the LED control board 14 to turn on/off the production LED 9. Control to execute the effect. Execution of various effects is realized by repeatedly performing effect operation control each time a timer interrupt occurs.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control process processing. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes any of S170 to S175 depending on the value of the effect process flag.

Next, the processing of S170 to S175 will be described. The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern designating command from the main board 11 has been received. The determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not the command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area. When the command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and this process ends. If the command has not been received, this process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be the finalized effect symbol as the variable display result of the effect symbol (S321). For example, the effect control CPU 120 makes a final stop based on the variable display content such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the design. As an example, "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probable change (big hit)", "probable change (big hit)" are included in the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result. is there.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", the variable display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state, and the fixed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "miss". It becomes. If the variable display content is "reach (miss)", after the variable display state of the effect design becomes the reach state, the fixed effect design of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes "miss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)", the variable display result is "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)", the variable display result is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the sure change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", the effect control CPU 120 finalizes different (non-matching) effect symbols in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R. To decide. CPU120 for production control extracts the numerical data showing the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for the production, etc., and the left definite symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in ROM121. By referencing, etc., the left finalized effect design which is stopped and displayed in the “left” effective design display area 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A among the finalized effect designs is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for production is extracted, and the right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, of the finalized effect symbols, the right finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" effect symbol display area 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. At this time, it may be determined such that the symbol number of the right confirmed production symbol is different from the symbol number of the left confirmed production symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for the effect is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the finalized effect symbols, the medium finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 5C of "medium" on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the effect control CPU 120 finalizes the same (matching) effect symbol in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R. To decide. The production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for left and right definite symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for production, and the left and right definite symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to, etc., among the fixed effect symbols, the effect symbols having the same symbol numbers stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A are displayed together. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, the final confirmed production symbol of the finalized production symbol which is stopped and displayed in the production symbol display area 5C of "medium" on the screen of the production display device 5A is determined. For example, as in the case where the symbol number of the medium finalized production symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left finalized production symbol and the right finalized production symbol, when the finalized production symbol is a big hit combination, an arbitrary value (for example, " 1”) is added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium finalized effect design so that the finalized effect design does not become a big hit combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium final production effect design, the difference between the left final production effect design and the right final production effect design (symbol difference) is determined, and the medium final production effect design corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. At, the same (matching) effect design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, "left", "middle", "right" effect symbol display area 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A, The effect symbols having the same symbol numbers stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R are determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)", whether or not the big hit middle promotion effect is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number It suffices to determine which one of the effect symbol shown) and the probability variation symbol (for example, an effect symbol indicating an odd number) is the fixed effect symbol. In the jackpot promotion promotion, after the combination of the effect symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot in the effect display device 5A but not the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed, the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state Is an effect that informs whether or not the probability change state will occur at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a fixed effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Moreover, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)" and the big hit middle promotion effect is not to be executed, a fixed effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of probability change symbols. On the other hand, even if the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the big hit middle promotion effect, from among a plurality of types of normal symbols, a fixed effect symbol is determined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big hit from being executed even though the probability variation patterns are collectively derived and displayed as the fixed effect symbols, and not to give the player a sense of distrust.

After the processing of S321, change effect setting processing for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit and the like. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-link” variable display effect is executed. You may do it.

After the process of S322, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, and uses it as a use pattern. set. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) prepared in accordance with the execution setting of the hold display change effect in the change effect setting process of S322, and the usage pattern. Set as.

After the process of S323, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect setting process (S323A) for operating the movable body in the case of the reach effect of the super reach A, for example.

In the movable-body effect setting process shown in FIG. 48(A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change pattern of the super reach A based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. Yes (S501). When it is determined that the variation pattern is the super reach A (S501; Yes), the presence or absence and the type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random numbers for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 48(B). It is used to determine whether or not the movable body effect is to be executed and, if it is to be executed, the operation pattern thereof.

As shown in FIG. 48(B), in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is”, and “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 29. )” is determined with a probability of 55%, and the probability of “execution” is “the operation pattern PTA-2 (the second operation mode shown in FIG. 30 after the first operation mode shown in FIG. 29)” is 30%. Is determined by. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 10%, “execution is performed”, and “motion pattern PTA-1 (first motion form)” is determined with a probability of 20%. Then, “execution is performed”, and “operation pattern PTA-2 (second operation mode after first operation mode)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body effect of the “operation pattern PTA-2 (the second operation mode after the first operation mode)” is better than that in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern. It is easy to be executed, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit about the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 operates in the second operation mode shown in FIG. 30, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the "movement pattern PTA-1 (first movement mode shown in FIG. 29)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 moves to the first movement shown in FIG. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit with respect to a movable body effect that operates in a motion form, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Note that here, the operation pattern PTA-2 is assumed to be in the second operation mode after being in the first operation mode, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation pattern PTA-2 may perform only the second operation mode shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executable not only in the variation pattern of super reach A but also in the variation pattern of super reach B. Further, the variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, in the determination of the movable body effect, the determination rate may be set such that the higher the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. The determination rate may be set to be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of times of pseudo-variation.

After the processing of S502 shown in FIG. 48(A), it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTA-1 or PTA-2 determined in S502 is set. If it is determined in S501 that it is not the super reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 47, following the processing of S323A, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined region (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122, corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (S324). Then, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the effect design etc. is made on the screen of the effect display device 5A (S325). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure change) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Thus, the effect symbols may be started to change in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area of the effect display device 5A.

After the processing in S325, the first hold display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold display in the second hold storage display area 5U are updated in response to the start of variable display of effect symbols. Settings are made (S326). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), the display portion corresponding to the holding number “1” (the leftmost display portion) in the first holding storage display area 5D is erased (digested) and , 1st reservation display in the display part corresponding to other reservation numbers "2"-"4" is moved left one by one (shift). On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), the display part (the rightmost display part) corresponding to the holding number "1" is erased (digested) in the second holding storage display area 5U. At the same time, the second hold displays on the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” are moved (shifted) rightward one by one. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect display during variable display (S327), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 46, the variable display process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect production process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (S341). .. As an example, in the process of S341, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). ). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 shown in FIG. 47, for example. When it is the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the LED control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5A, 5X, 5Y, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect LED 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off. Alternatively, a part of or all of these may be combined to execute the pending display change effect with a predetermined effect device.

When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), after the process of S343, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (S346). The reach production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern, for example. When it is determined in S346 that the reach effect period is reached (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach effect period is performed (S347). After the processing of S347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movable object effect flag is on (S347A). When the movable-body effect flag is on (S347A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation of the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation period (S347B). If the operation is valid (S347B; Yes), it is determined whether the stick controller 31A is operated (S347C). When the stick controller 31A is operated (S347C; Yes), the operation flag is set to the ON state (S347D). When it is determined in S347B that the operation is not in a valid period (S347B; No), when it is determined in S347C that the stick controller 31A is not operated (S347C; No), and after the processing of S347D, the operation is performed. It is determined whether it is during the body production period (S347E). In the case of the movable body effect period (S347E; Yes), it is determined whether the operation flag is on (S347F). When the operation flag is on (S347F; Yes), the movable body effect execution process is performed (S347G). When the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), an alternative effect execution process that replaces the movable object effect is performed (S347H). Even when the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), the movable body effect execution process may be performed (S347G).

When it is determined that the movable body effect flag is not on in S347A (S347A; No), when it is determined that the movable body effect period is not in S347E (S347E; No), after the processing of S347G, , After the process of S347H, the effect control CPU 120, for example, based on the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and other effects during variable display including variable display operation of effect symbols. Control is performed to execute (S348).

When the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (S349; No), the variable display effect production process is ended and stands by. After the variable display time has elapsed, if the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may do it. When the symbol determination command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the display result in the variable display of the effect symbol The final stop design (confirmed effect design) is controlled to be displayed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. After the processing of S350, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (S351). After the processing of S351, the movable body effect flag and the operation flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Then, after changing the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S352), the variable display effect process is ended.

The special figure waiting process of S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current elapsed time (which may be measured by a predetermined timer) since the final stop symbol is derived and displayed has reached a preset hit start designation command reception waiting time. However, when the hit start designation command is received when it has not reached (when the hit start designation command reception flag is on), a big hit medium performance (from fanfare start executed during big hit game state to before ending) Effect setting) (setting of effect control pattern, etc.) is performed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", and this processing ends. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not been reached and the hit start designation command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If the current elapsed time has reached the waiting time, it is determined that the variable display result of the special figure game is "miss", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this processing is ended. Since the current elapsed time has not reached the waiting time and the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, this processing is ended as it is.

The hitting process in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to effect contents in the big hit game state, and causes effect images based on the setting contents to be displayed on the screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. Operating the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and issuing commands (lighting signals to the LED control board 14). ) Is used to turn on and off the effect LED 9, and various effect operations are controlled during a predetermined period during which the special winning opening door as an attacker is in an open state. In the hitting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

The ending process of S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5", and is a process for executing the ending when the jackpot gaming state ends. In the ending process, display control is performed in the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y to notify the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended.

Next, an example of the composite effect including the movable object effect and the display device effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50: (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of compound production.

First, as shown in FIG. 50(A), for example, after a reach state is established during a predetermined symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the effect display devices 5X, 5Y The display moves to approach the position on the front side, and the display indicating that the super reach production or the like has been developed is executed on the production display devices 5X and 5Y.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y come into contact with each other to form one display section, and at the same time, the operation is promoted to urge the player to operate the operation means. The image is displayed.

When the player operates the operation means during the operation acceptance period of the operation means, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the standby position and the movable object effect in the present embodiment. The movable body effect is executed assuming that the start condition is satisfied, and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R perform the effect operation to move the movable body unit from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode. Changes to. At this time, each movable body is superposed in front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize.

When the first operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are housed, and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body 300 and The four movable bodies 600L and 600R perform an effect operation, and the movable body unit changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode. Also at this time, each movable body is superposed in front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, during execution of the movable body effect (for example, when the movable body unit changes from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode as shown in FIG. 50D, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode, FIG. When changing to the second operation mode as shown in (E), the gaming area side light emitting parts (for example, the light emitting parts (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device. 6B light emitting component (LED), at least one of the light emitting component (LED) for causing at least part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light, or with lower brightness than when the movable body effect is not executed. It emits light. Thereby, the movable body effect can be made conspicuous, and the player can be made to pay attention to the movable body effect. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, when the second operation form of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the storing operation of the first movable body 300 and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R is executed, and the movable body effect is finished. Then, the super reach effect is executed, and after the execution of the super reach effect, for example, in the case of a big hit, the symbols indicating the big hit are aligned on the effect display device 5A (for example, 7-7-7) and An effect image (for example, a character or a character) is displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the first movable body 300 operably provided, and the first movable body 300 are controlled. The production control CPU 120 as a control means for performing the game is provided, and the window portion 51 is provided with the first transparent body 250 and the hole portion 270 which is arranged closer to the game area 10 than the first transparent body 250. At least a part of the first movable body 300 enters the space S formed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 through the hole 270. It is possible, and the first movable body 300 can execute the second operation of moving to the first effect position where the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. That is, the first movable body 300 can be brought into the first effect position shown in FIG. 35 or FIG. 36 from the first standby position (origin position) shown in FIG. 34 at a stretch, and provides a surprising movable object effect. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, an acceleration/advance means for accelerating and advancing the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 (with the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700). Therefore, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced diagonally downward along the rail 701 of the base member 700. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

For example, since the rail 701 of the base member 700 is a guide member having a linear path (downward guide path portion) directed obliquely downward, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is directed downward along the rail 701 directed obliquely downward. By being guided, the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced to the second position P2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Note that a part of the rail 701 may have a portion other than downward.

Further, the first movable body 300 is a position not overlapping the effect display device 5A (display means) (or a part thereof may be a position overlapping the display means), that is, a first standby position shown in FIG. 34 ( It is possible to move from the origin position) to the first effect position shown in FIG. 35 or 36. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position is invisible or hard to see by the player, and the first movable body 300 located at the origin position suddenly appears at the first effect position, so the player Can give a surprise to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 to move the first movable body 300 at the first standby position via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. A first control in which the front control plate is moved to the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 and a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 after the first control is executed. The first protrusion 303 which is a part of the main control unit 302 after moving the first protrusion 303 in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control or executing the first control. The second projecting portion 304, which is a part of a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the above, is moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control. It is possible to carry out the second control. According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the first transparent body 250 side, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 303). By performing the second control in which the protrusion 304) is moved in the direction (front upper direction) different from the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control on the first transparent body 250 side with respect to the second transparent body 260. Since the player can be given more impact, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Specifically, in addition to the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the first transparent body 250 side, after performing the first control, a direction different from the moving direction (the front lower direction) in the first control. By performing the second control of moving the front body (upward), a part of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304) is expanded and the first movable body 300 is expanded. Since it looks like it is present, it can give an impact to the player.

Further, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game balls can flow down between the game board surface 200A, and forms a flow-down area of the game ball between itself and the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole portion 270 is formed at a position corresponding to the effect area (the opening 2c formed in the board 200) that does not correspond to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10. In other words, it is necessary to secure the flow-down area of the game ball, so there is a limit to making the hole 270 large, and in order to pass the first movable body 300 through the hole 270, the first movable body 300 is It cannot be larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the front side, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the main body 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304). ) Is moved in a direction (front upper direction) different from the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmissive body 260, so that the hole portion 270 becomes unnecessary. A part of the main body portion 302 is expanded when the first movable body 300 is viewed from the front (player side) at a position closer to the player than the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the size. Since it can be shown like this, a more powerful effect can be provided to the player.

In addition, in the second control, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304, which are part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302, to move in the moving direction (lower front). Direction) to move in the direction intersecting with (direction above). By doing so, the movement (projection operation) of the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304 of the first movable body 300 in the second control can be appropriately viewed.

Further, in the second control, the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302, intersect with the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. Direction, and in order to move in the front upper direction, which is the direction along the front transmission plate 251, the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 are arranged around the main body 302 when viewed from the front. Since it can be expanded and moved toward the player side, a more powerful effect can be provided.

The first movable body 300 moves in a direction (front side) opposite to the game area 10 in the second control, that is, the first control and the second control move so as to gradually push out to the front side, and thus a powerful effect. It can be performed.

Further, the first movable body 300 moves to the front side while descending to the first lower position from the first standby position to the first effect position by the first control, so that the first movable body 300 moves to the front side, as compared with the one that moves horizontally, on the player side. You can make it easier to understand how you are moving toward. Further, not only the surface A but also the surface B of the main body 302 can be visually recognized when moving forward, so that the main body 302 can be made large.

Further, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R that support the first movable body 300, and in the second operation mode, the fourth movable body 600L that supports the first movable body 300. , 600R or the like. By doing so, the posture of the first movable body 300 during operation and after operation can be stabilized.

More specifically, the first movable body 300 is operably supported by the base member 700 provided on the back surface side of the game board 2, and moves to the front side via the board face plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since the moving distance is longer than that of a conventional movable body that moves only to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, it may be possible to support it stably via a guide rail or the like, but to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. When the guide rail or the like is provided, visibility may be deteriorated, for example, when the movable body effect is not executed, the guide rail or the like makes it difficult to see a part of the rear game area 10. Therefore, by supporting the other fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R only during the performance operation in this way, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game area 10 from being reduced when the movable body performance is not executed. it can.

In addition, the second movable body different from the first movable body 300 (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.), the effect control CPU120, the. After performing the first control, it is possible to perform control to move the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R to the first movable body 300 so that they can be combined. By doing so, the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, etc.) support each other by the combination. Therefore, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

Specifically, in the first operation mode and the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R different from the first movable body 300 are provided. Since the first movable body 300 is disposed so as to come into contact with or come close to the peripheral area of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 is swayed after the projecting operation of the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304. Even so, they can support each other and stabilize their posture.

In addition, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first operation mode, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode. When combined with, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged rearward of the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, when the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R) are combined, Since the first movable body 300 is located at a position different in the moving direction (front-back direction) in the first control, a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, the window portion 51 can open and close the game area 10 (see FIG. 3), and the first movable body 300 does not contact the second transparent body 260 when opening and closing the window portion 51 (see FIG. 39). By doing so, damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented.

Specifically, the front portion of the first movable body 300 (the portion arranged on the front transmission plate 251 side of the hole 270 in the closed state of the opening/closing frame 50) is within the rotation region Z of the hole 270. Since they are arranged, the rear transmission plate 261 does not come into contact with the first movable body 300 even when the opening/closing frame 50 is opened/closed. According to this, for example, during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control and the second control, an operation error or the like occurs and the first movable body 300 remains stopped at the first effect position. Even when it is necessary to open the open/close frame 50 and perform maintenance, since the open/close frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 are damaged. Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the first movable body 300 is arranged in the rotation region Z of the hole 270 even during the execution of the first control and the second control in the movable body production, the rear transparent body is not transparent. Although the form in which the opening/closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the plate 261 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening/closing frame 50 is not contacted with the second transparent body when opening/closing. Just do it.

In addition, the first movable body 300, after performing the first control, can emit light toward a portion other than the first transparent body 250 (for example, movable body LED 350A, movable body LED 350B, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR). , And movable LEDs 350DL, 350DR, etc.) are provided. By doing so, not only the player but also the surroundings can be appealed to.

Specifically, not only the moving effect of the first movable body 300, but also the light emitting effect of the movable body LEDs 350A, the movable body LEDs 350B, the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR, and the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR can be performed, so that the production is performed in a wide range. Can be appealed.

Further, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming a gaming area 10, an opening/closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 provided so as to be openable/closable with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening/closing frame 50. An effect LED 9 as an opening/closing door side light emitting component provided in an area other than 51 and an effect control CPU 120 as an emission control means for performing emission control of the effect LED 9 are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first movable body. It is possible to change the light emission mode of the production LED 9 to the first to fifth light emission modes according to the operations of the 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R. .. By doing so, the movement of the first movable body 300 can be appropriately produced.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode and then to emit light in the second light emission mode having a lower brightness than the first light emission mode. By doing so, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the transparency of the first movable body 300 and the like.

Specifically, after performing the first control in the first light emission mode, in the second light emission mode in which the movable body unit has a lower luminance than the first light emission mode in the first operation mode (during the second control). Since the light is emitted, during the second control, which is an effect in which the first movable body 300 appears to be enlarged, halation or the like occurs due to the light of the effect LED 9, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of each movable body. ..

In addition, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming a gaming area 10, an opening/closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening/closing frame 50. The production LED 9 is provided as an opening/closing door side light emitting component provided in a region other than 51, and a production control CPU 120 is provided as a light emission control means for performing emission control of the production LED 9. It is provided so that the first movable body 300 can be irradiated with light after being exposed. By doing so, the first movable body 300 can be made conspicuous by light.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications are possible (the above-mentioned configuration may be deleted). The following is a modification of the above embodiment. At least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the hole 270 is formed in the second transparent body 260, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the second transparent body 260 may be formed with a cutout portion having a size that allows the first movable body 300 to enter.

(Modification 5)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 moves diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in Modification 5 shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 includes a first movement ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and a first movement ACT1. The second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be executable. That is, the first movable body 300 may operate in two steps as shown in FIG. For example, the first movable body 300 moves from the first standby position (origin position P0), which does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, to the first position P1 directly below the first motion ACT1( For example, movement in the hanging direction) is possible. Further, the first movable body 300 enters from the first position P1 toward the player side between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 via the hole 270 of the rear transparent plate 261. The second movement ACT2 (for example, movement in the horizontal direction) that moves to the second position P2 is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is at the origin position which is a position where it does not overlap with the effect display device 5A (display means) (or may be a position where part thereof overlaps with the display means). It is operable from P0 to the first position P1 or the second position P2. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 is invisible or hard to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 located at the origin position P0 suddenly appears at the first position P1 or the second position P2. It will give you surprises. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52A, the first movable body 300 may have different operation speeds between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed at the first speed V1. The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed at the second speed V2. The operation speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operation speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). For example, the first speeds V1 and V2 may be maximum speeds or average speeds. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the modified example 5, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 52(A). It is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and the operation pattern in the case of execution, using the operation table.

As shown in FIG. 52A, in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is”, and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with “execution is performed”, the “second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)” is 20%. It is determined with a probability of “execution is performed”, and the “second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the first operation ACT1 and then the second operation ACT2)” is larger than that in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern. The effect can be easily executed, and the first movable object 300 can have an expectation of a big hit about the movable object effect in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. You can also have a sense of expectation of a big hit about the movable body effect that executes ACT1, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the modified example 5, the first movable body 300 includes the first motion ACT1 that operates at the first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transparent body 260 and the second transparent body 260 can be performed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 which is inserted between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body that is powerful for the player. A performance can be provided. Further, the operation speeds of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 are different. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

For example, it is assumed that the operation speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operation speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). For this reason, the operating speed of the second position P2 closer to the player is faster than the operating speed of the first position P1 far from the player, so that a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

The operation speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) may be lower than the operation speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). In this case, since the operation speed when the first movable body 300 enters through the hole 270 or the notch of the rear transmission plate 261 is slow, the vibration of the first movable body 300 in the second operation ACT2 is slow. (Such as vibration in a direction different from the traveling direction) is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from coming into contact with the hole 270 or the notch. Therefore, the failure of the first movable body 300 due to the second operation ACT2 can be reduced.

At least one of the operation speed, the operation range, the operation path, and the operation direction may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 52, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 have different operation speeds, and as shown in FIG. 51, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 operate. The directions are also different. For example, with respect to the operation range, the second operation ACT2 may have a larger operation range than the first operation ACT1 or vice versa. Regarding the operation path, the second operation ACT2 may have a larger operation path than the first operation ACT1 or vice versa. Regarding the operation direction, the second operation ACT2 may have a larger operation path than the first operation ACT1 or may have a smaller operation path.

Further, as in another example 1 shown in FIG. 52(B), the first movable body 300 has a light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL,) that accompanies the operation in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. (350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) may have different light emission modes. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed in the first light emission mode (for example, the brightness I1). The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed in the second light emission mode (for example, the brightness I2). The brightness I2 of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the brightness I1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the other example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 52(B). Whether or not the movable body effect is to be executed, and if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined using the operation table.

As shown in FIG. 52B, in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is”, and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with “execution is performed”, the “second action pattern PTC-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)” is 20%. It is determined with a probability of “execution is performed”, and the “second action pattern PTC-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTC-2 (first action ACT1 and then second action ACT2)” is larger than that in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern. The effect is easily executed, and the first movable object 300 can have an expectation of a big hit about the movable object effect in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. You can also have a sense of expectation of a big hit about the movable body effect that executes ACT1, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the modified example 1, the first movable body 300 includes the first motion ACT1 that operates in the first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transparent body 260 and the second transparent body 260 can be performed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 which is inserted between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body that is powerful for the player. A performance can be provided. Further, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 are different in the light emission mode of the light emitting means (for example, the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR) accompanying the operation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

For example, the second light emission mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the first light emission mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. Therefore, it is possible to reduce glare when the first movable body 300 approaches the player side.

The second light emission mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than the first light emission mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, it is possible to make the first movable body 300 dazzling when it approaches the player side, and it is possible to provide a luminous effect with an impact.

In addition, in another example 1, it is assumed that the light emitting means of the first movable body 300 (for example, the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) have different luminances as the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode. , Light amount, emission color, blinking interval, emission sequence (for example, the order in which the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR are turned on) may be different from each other.

Further, as in another example 2 shown in FIG. 52(C), the first movable body 300 serves as a sound output unit (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) associated with the operation in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The effect sound may be different. In the first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1), the effect sound in the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) is output. In the second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2), the effect sound in the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) is output. The volume Vo2 of the second operation ACT2 is higher than the volume Vo1 of the first operation ACT1. In detail, in the process of S502 of the second example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical value data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical value data and the movable object effect determination shown in FIG. 52(C). Whether or not the movable body effect is to be executed, and if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined using the operation table.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with “execution is performed”, the “second action pattern PTC-2 (second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)” is 20%. It is determined with a probability of “execution is performed”, and the “second action pattern PTC-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTC-2 (first action ACT1 and then second action ACT2)” is larger than that in the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern. The effect is easily executed, and the first movable object 300 can have an expectation of a big hit about the movable object effect in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. You can also have a sense of expectation of a big hit about the movable body effect that executes ACT1, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the second example, the first movable body 300 includes the first operation ACT1 that operates at the first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250. The second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transparent body 260 and the second transparent body 260 can be performed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 which is inserted between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body that is powerful for the player. A performance can be provided. Further, the effect sound accompanying the operation (for example, the speakers 8L and 8R) is different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

For example, it is assumed that the effect sound of the second effect sound mode of the second action ACT2 (for example, volume Vo2) is louder than the effect sound of the first effect sound mode of the first action ACT1 (for example, volume Vo1). Therefore, the second action of the first movable body 300, which is closer to the player, can be excited by the effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

The effect sound of the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second action ACT2 may be lower than the effect sound of the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first action ACT1. In this case, the second motion of the first movable body 300, which is closer to the player, can be made to pay attention to the second motion ACT2 itself of the first movable body 300 by intentionally weakening the effect by the effect sound. For example, the second action ACT2 of the first movable body 300 can be focused on by the quiet effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

In addition, in the second example, the volume of the effect sound accompanying the motion is different between the first motion ACT1 and the second motion ACT2, but the invention is not limited to this. The first action ACT1 and the second action ACT2 may be different in at least one of the volume, pitch, tempo, song, melody, etc. of the effect sound accompanying the action. As an example, as an example in which the songs are different, the first effect sound mode of the first action ACT1 is, for example, the song A is reproduced at a predetermined volume, and the second effect sound mode of the second action ACT2 is, for example, the song B is a predetermined volume (the song). The volume may be the same as that of A). As an example in which the music and the volume are different, the first effect sound mode of the first action ACT1 is, for example, the music A is reproduced at the first volume, and the second effect sound mode of the second action ACT2 is the song B is the second. You may make it reproduce|regenerate by the volume (volume different from the 1st volume in the case of music A).

As shown in FIGS. 52A to 52C, the first movable body 300 performs the second action ACT2 after performing the first action ACT1 and the second action ACT2 after performing the first action ACT1. In some cases, the operation may return to the origin position P0 without performing the operation. Since the first motion ACT1 and the second motion ACT2 have different expectations (eg, big hits expectations) that are controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to produce movable objects. The player can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, when the second action ACT2 has a higher degree of expectation than the first action ACT1, the second action ACT2 becomes an action effect at a position closer to the player than the first action ACT1, It is possible to enhance the effect of moving body production.

Further, as the notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variation display of the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 53A, various notice effects can be executed at a plurality of timings from the change start to the change stop. Is becoming As these notice productions, there are reach notices that indicate whether or not to reach, reach notices that indicate whether or not to develop into an advantageous reach, and jackpot notices that indicate the possibility of a big hit. You may make it perform the movable body effect of the said embodiment and the modification in these notice effects.

As an example of determining a movable body effect at the time of reach advance notice, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data. And the movable-body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53B may be used to determine the operation pattern of the movable-object effect. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the movable body effect is executed and, if it is executed, the operation pattern thereof. As shown in FIG. 53(B), in the case of the super reach variation pattern, “only the first action ACT1” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1” is at a probability of 70%. Is determined by. When developing to super reach, it is easier to execute the movable body effect of "the second motion ACT2 after the first action ACT1" than the movable body effect of the "first motion ACT1 only". You can have a sense of expectation, and the enjoyment of the game improves.

As the movable body effect at the time of advance notice of reach development, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(A1), the normal reach effect is started, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, if the first action ACT1 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53(B), as shown in FIG. 54(A2), The movable body 300 performs the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). When the second motion ACT2 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53(B), after the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 54(A2) has performed the first motion ACT1, As shown in FIG. 54(A3), the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 advances toward the player side toward the second position P2). Then, as shown in FIG. 54(A4), the super reach development is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. In addition, in the case of only the first operation ACT1, it is not necessary to develop into the super reach. Further, in the determination example shown in FIG. 53(B), the reach development pattern indicating the reach development without the first movable body 300 operating may be selectably provided.

As an example of determining the movable body effect when the big hit is announced, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data. An operation pattern of the movable body effect may be determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53(C). In the case of the super reach A (miss) variation pattern, the movable body effect is not executed. That is, the first movable body 300 does not operate and remains at the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body effect of "the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1" is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit with respect to a movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 performs the second motion ACT2 after performing the first motion ACT1, and if the first movable body 300 operates ( The second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1) It is possible to know that a big hit will be made (a big hit confirmation notice), and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

As the movable-body effect at the time of big hit announcement, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(B1), a super-reach effect is started, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A in the tilt effect is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 54(B2), the first movable body 300 moves to the first motion ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). Move). Then, in the case of the super reach (big hit) shown in FIG. 53(C), the first movable body 300 has the second action ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 is a game as shown in FIG. 54(B3). The second position P2 is advanced toward the person side. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(B4), the big hit display is made, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach (loss) shown in FIG. 53(C), the first movable body 300 does not operate, and as shown in FIG. 54(B5), the first movable body 300 stops at the origin position P0. The display of the loss is displayed as it is. In other words, in the movable body effect at the time of the big hit announcement, it can be known that the first moveable body 300 moves (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) to make a big hit (big hit confirmation announcement).

In FIG. 54(B1), the stick controller 31A is operated when the first movable body 300 is at the origin position P0. However, as shown in FIG. 54(B2), the first movable body 300 is in the first position. After moving to P1, the action effect of performing the second action ACT2 of the first movable body 300 based on the operation of the stick controller 31A may be executable. For example, “not operating” shown in FIG. 53C may be set to “only first operation”. In this case, it is possible to provide a motion effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second motion ACT2 based on the detection of the motion of the player. That is, the player can be watched whether the first movable body 300 in the first position P1 moves to the second position P2, the player can participate in the game, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be made

Further, at the first timing and the second timing in the variable display (variable display), the execution rate at which only the first operation ACT1 is executed, and the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1. May be different. For example, at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development announcement shown in FIG. 53(A) and the execution timing of the jackpot announcement (second timing) shown in FIG. 53(A), only the first action ACT1 is executed. The execution ratio is different from the execution ratio in which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the first operation ACT1 is executed. In this case, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, both execution ratios may be different at a plurality of timings in a predetermined notice (for example, reach advance notice).

(Modification 6A)
In the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 moves diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIG. 34 ). However, it is not limited to this. As in the modified example 6A shown in FIG. 55, the first movable body 300 may be moved from the origin position P0 to the second position P2 along the concave arcuate path RT1 or may be moved along the convex arcuate path RT2. May be. That is, the downward guide path portion (rails, guide members, etc., not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a convex or concave downward arcuate path. According to Modification 6A, the first movable body 300 can be guided in a downward arcuate path, and the first movable body 300 can be accelerated downward and advanced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(Modification 6B)
Further, as in the modified example 6B shown in FIG. 56, after the first movable body 300 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1, the first movable body 300 becomes concave at the first position P1 and the second position P2. It may be swingable along the arcuate path RT3. That is, the swing guide path portion (rails, guide members, etc., not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a concave arc path. According to Modification 6B, since the first movable body 300 can swing along the concave arcuate route RT3, the movable body swinging effect in which the first movable body 300 advances and retracts is provided. be able to. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Modification 6C)
Further, as in a modified example 6C shown in FIG. 57, the first movable body 300 is capable of advancing to the midway position PS1 of the concave arcuate route RT1 and the advance position PS2 which has advanced beyond the midway position PS1. The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit) to be controlled in an advantageous state is made different between the case where the movable body 300 advances to the midway position PS1 and the case where the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS2. Good. According to Modification 6C, the degree of expectation that the first movable body 300 is advanced to the midway position PS1 and the first movable body 300 is advanced to the advanced position PS2 (for example, a big hit). Since the expectations are different), it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, when the advance position PS2 has a higher degree of expectation than the midway position PS1, the advance position PS2 provides a motion effect at a position closer to the player than the midway position PS1. The effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 6D)
Further, as in Modification 6D shown in FIG. 58, the window portion 51 includes wall portions WL and WR (partition plates) extending in the direction connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. The walls WL and WR may be provided upright on at least one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window 51 can be increased. Further, the wall portions WL and WR may be connected by the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be further increased. In particular, in the window portion 51 having the space portion S into which the first movable body 300 can enter, such strength improvement is useful. Downward linear or arcuate guide holes WL1 and WR1 (or guide grooves) for guiding the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 are formed in the wall portions WL and WR, respectively. .. Projecting rods BP projecting from the left side surface and the right side surface of the first movable body 300 can be inserted into the respective guide holes WL1 and WR1 of the wall portions WL and WR. Therefore, the wall portions WL and WR can not only increase the strength of the window portion 51, but also reduce the vertical vibration of the first movable body 300 that moves to the second position P2, and thus the first movable body 300 can be prevented. Can be stably supported.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, although the rail 701 advances toward the hole 270 as shown in FIG. 34, it does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, but the rail 701 does not. The (guide member) may enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 via the hole 270. According to this, since the rail 701 can advance toward the hole 270 or the notch, the first movable body 300 is accelerated by the advanced rail 701, and the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are separated. You can advance in the meantime. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Further, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be restricted based on the opening detection of the opening/closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. According to this, damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, when the second protrusion is changed to the first protrusion state so that the first protrusion 303 spreads around the main body 302 by the execution of the second control, the first protrusion when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The protrusion 303 does not protrude outside the region corresponding to the hole 270, that is, it does not stick out toward the game region 10 side of the game ball, so that the first protrusion 303 does not hinder the visual recognition of the game ball. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 corresponds to the game area 10 of the game ball, as shown in a modification 7 of FIG. 59. It may be moved so as to overlap the area to be played, or, as shown in Modification 8 of FIG. 60, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is moved to an area corresponding to the game area 10 of the game ball. You may move the whole main-body part 302 so that it may overlap.

(Modification 7)
Here, Modification Example 7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit according to Modification 7. As shown in FIG. 59, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the movable portions 306L and 306R can be moved in the left-right direction to a predetermined portion located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. When provided, when these movable portions 306L and 306R are respectively moved outward, at least a part of these movable portions 306L and 306R is outside the area corresponding to the hole portion 270. You may make it overlap with the position corresponding to 10.

(Modification 8)
In addition, modified example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit according to Modification 8. As shown in FIG. 60, in the main body 302 of the first movable body 300, the protrusions 307L and 307R project from the main body 302 at a predetermined portion located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. When provided, the first movable body including the main body portion 302 so that at least a part of these protruding portions 307L and 307R overlaps with a position corresponding to the game area 10 outside the area corresponding to the hole portion 270. The entire 300 may be moved in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 at the first standby position is set such that the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302 is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although the form in which it can be moved to the front side until it is located on the transmission plate 251 side has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the non-movable body that is inoperably provided on the base part is not limited to this. The rear transmission plate 261 may be provided so as to be located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270. Further, in this case, not only the movable body used for the movable body production, but also at least a part of the guide passage for guiding the game ball, for example, through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261, the rear transmission plate 261. You may provide so that it may be located in the front transmission plate 251 side rather than.

For example, the warp passage 800 as an example of the guide passage is a guide passage that guides a game ball flowing down the game area 10 to a predetermined area (for example, a stage or a winning opening), but the guide passage is such a warp. It is not limited to the passage 800, and may be a winning passage for guiding a winning ball that has entered the winning area, a ball passage for effect, or the like.

(Modification 9)
Here, Modification Example 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 61A is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a fixed type ball passage according to Modification 9, and FIGS. 61B and 61C are vertical cross-sectional views showing a moving type ball passage according to Modification 7. FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), a part of a passage forming member 801 made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property that forms a warp passage 800 that is partially bent forward is formed in the rear transmission plate 261. The warp passage 800 is inserted into the portion 271 from the back side, and a part of the warp passage 800 is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 271.

By doing so, it becomes possible to see through the passage forming member 801 that the game ball flows down to a position near the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. ..

Further, a passage forming member made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property, which forms a first warp passage 800A that allows the game ball to linearly flow down and a second warp passage 800B that causes the game ball to meander back and forth to flow down. A part of 801 is provided so as to be movable back and forth between a first passage position (see FIG. 61(B)) and a second passage position in front of the first passage position (see FIG. 61(C)), When moved to the second passage position, at least a part of the second warp passage 800B may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 271 formed in the rear transmission plate 261.

By doing so, it becomes possible to see through the passage forming member 801 that the game ball flows down to a position near the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. ..

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a part of the main body 302 that moves by the second control is the first protrusion 303 or the second protrusion 304 that protrudes from the inside of the main body 302. The invention is not limited to this, and in the movable body, a portion (predetermined portion) or a portion thereof located closer to the first transmission body than the second transmission body through the hole portion by the first control is the second portion. It suffices that the control can move in a direction different from the moving direction in the first control. That is, the portion that operates in the second control is not limited to the one that performs the protruding operation, but may be the one that can move by sliding or rotating. Further, if the moving direction of the predetermined portion of the movable body is different from the moving direction of the movable body in the first control, it can be freely changed, for example, left/right, up/down, diagonal direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, only the predetermined portion (front half portion) of the main body portion 302 is positioned on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire first movable body 300 may be located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, has been exemplified to slide forward and downward from the first standby position to the first effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be one that horizontally moves forward from the first standby position toward the first effect position, or one that moves front upper, front left, front right, or the like. That is, the rear transmission plate 261 may be provided so as to be movable from the rear side to the front side. Further, as long as it moves to the front side, it may move to the front side by rotation instead of sliding movement.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, has been exemplified such that the front portion is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 at the first standby position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be arranged such that the entirety thereof is located on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 in the first standby position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the predetermined portion of the main body 302 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 when only the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and when a plurality of movable bodies such as the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the effect position, the predetermined part is rear-transparent. It may be located on the front side of the plate 261.

Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable body 300 illustrated the form arrange|positioned above the production|presentation display apparatus 5A, this invention is not limited to this, The arrangement position of a movable body. Can be changed arbitrarily.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the movable body that operates so that the predetermined portion is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 when the movable body is moved to the production position, the first movable body that is a movable accessory for production. Although 300 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined portion is provided when the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are moved to the effect position. May be applied as a movable body that operates so as to be positioned on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, or may be a movable body for performance provided separately from these. Furthermore, not only the movable accessory for the production connected to the production control board 12 in this way, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold display device. Even if various display devices connected to the main substrate 11, such as 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc. are applied as movable bodies. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 as a movable body is exemplified in such a manner that at least a part (second half) is provided on the back side of the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of being played, it may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A of the board plate 200.

In addition, in the embodiment, the movable body is supported by the second movable body different from the movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R). Although the form of supporting means has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a lock mechanism for fixing the movable body itself or a drive mechanism for operating the movable body at appropriate timing may be used as the supporting means. Good.

Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the 2nd movable body 400, the 3rd movable bodies 500L, 500R, and the 4th movable bodies 600L, 600R were united with the 1st movable body 300, it is a rear side rather than the rear transmission plate 261. Although the form arranged is illustrated, for example, by configuring the movable body to be extendable and retractable back and forth and extending from a position rearward of the rear transmission plate 261 to a position frontward of the rear transmission plate 261. A sense of depth may be generated.

Moreover, in the said embodiment, after the 2nd movable body 400, the 3rd movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the 4th movable bodies 600L and 600R were united with the 1st movable body 300, the 1st protrusion part 303 and the 1st protrusion part 303 by the 2nd control. Although the form in which the two protrusions 304 protrude is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 may protrude or move at the same time as or before the combination. You may do it.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, and the window portion 51 includes the first transparent body 250 and the first transparent body 250. The second transmission body 260 is arranged closer to the game area 10 than the first transmission body 250, and the first transmission body 250 has a front transmission plate 251 as a plate portion and a first tubular body 252 as a tubular portion. And a second tubular body 253, and the tubular portion has a reinforcing structure portion 254.

Thus, by having the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion, the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 251 as the plate portion can be provided without increasing the thickness of the open/close frame 50. Since the transparent plate 261 can be arranged separately, the effect of production is improved, and since the tubular portion of the first transparent body 250 is reinforced, the front transparent plate 251 and the rear transparent plate 251 which are the plate-shaped portion of the first transparent body 250 are reinforced. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as a fraudulent member entering from a cylindrical portion that covers the space S formed between the transparent plate 261 and the space.

More specifically, the tubular portion including the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is provided so as to be visible to the player so as to project forward from the opening of the opening/closing frame 50, and thus the glass There is a high possibility that an illegal act such as an illegal member may enter through the tubular portion while avoiding the front transmission plate 251 made of a plate. However, since the reinforcing structure portion 254 is provided at a plurality of places as described above, Since the strength of the tubular portion is improved, it is possible to suppress an unjust act such as bending the tubular portion to create a gap between the tubular portion and the front transmission plate 251, or making a hole or the like to enter an unauthorized member. ..

Further, the reinforcing structure portion 254 is a concave-convex portion (for example, the convex strips 254A, 255A or the concave strips 254B, 255B) that extends from the front transmissive plate 251 toward the second transmissive body 260. The tubular portion can be suitably reinforced. More specifically, since the strength in the front-rear direction is improved, it is possible to prevent the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 from being damaged by an impact when an external force is applied such as the front transmission plate 251 being hit. ..

Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, which are tubular portions, are tubularly made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material. In addition, since the outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated, ambient light (for example, external light or from an adjacent gaming machine) It is possible to prevent the visibility of the game area 10 from being lowered due to the entry of light).

Further, since the reinforcing structure portions 254 are formed at a plurality of positions in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion. Since the decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion by the plating process performed on the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface, the appearance can be improved.

Further, below the window portion 51, an upper plate 90 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls is provided, and the front transmission plate 251 is provided so as to incline downward toward the game area 10 side. It is possible to prevent the first transparent body 250 from getting in the way when the game ball is thrown into the upper plate 90.

The first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are separably integrated. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are integrated by attaching the screw N2, and can be separated by removing the screw N2. ing.

By doing so, for example, one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 is scratched or deteriorated over time, so that the visibility of the game area 10 is reduced or damaged. When it becomes necessary to replace the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, only one of them can be partially replaced, so that the cost at the time of replacement can be reduced. .. In particular, only the second transmissive body 260 having the rear transmissive plate 261 in which the shape and position of the hole 270 are different depending on the model can be exchanged, and the first transmissive body 250 can be used commonly to a plurality of models. Become.

Further, in the embodiment, the hole portion 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 forming the second transmission body 260 is at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the face plate 200, that is, the flow-down area of the game ball. Although the form is formed at a position corresponding to a region (effect region) other than the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part is formed at a position corresponding to the flow-down region of the game ball. May be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the hole portion 270 is formed in the rear transmission plate 261 forming the second transmission body 260 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear transmission plate is not limited thereto. A notch portion may be formed in 261. Specifically, for example, in order to make the game area 10 visible, the rear transmission plate 261 is formed in substantially the same shape as the game area 10, but a notch is formed in a part of the peripheral edge thereof. The movable body may be allowed to move to the front side through the notch until it is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the hole 270 is provided only at one place, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hole and the notch are formed at a plurality of places. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first transmissive body 250 includes the front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion made of a transmissive member and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as tubular portions. The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are configured by non-transmissive members, that is, a part of the first transmissive body 250 is configured by a non-transmissive member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may also be formed of a transparent member. That is, in the first transparent body 250, at least a part of the plate-shaped portion or the cylindrical portion may be made of a transparent member.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second transmissive body 260 has the rear transmissive plate 261 and the frame body 262, and the frame body 262 is made of a non-transmissive member, that is, the second transmissive body. Although the form in which a part of the body 260 is made of a non-transmissive member has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame body 262 may also be made of a transmissive member. That is, at least a part of the second transmissive body 260 may be made of a transmissive member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are applied as the tubular portion forming the first transparent body 250 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the tubular portion is a perfect tubular one as long as it is constituted by a wall portion that closes the side peripheral surface of the space S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. For example, the side wall portion may be formed in an arch shape. Specifically, the tubular portion has a substantially quadrangular shape in side view, but may have a triangular shape in side view.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portions that configure the first transmissive body 250 are different from each other. Although the form constituted by integrally assembling the members has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the plate-shaped portion and the cylindrical portion are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. You may do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tubular portion is exemplified by the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, that is, the plurality of members, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be composed of a single member.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 is a glass material, the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 are non-translucent synthetic resin materials, and the rear transmission plate 261 is a translucent synthetic material. Although the form made of a resin material is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front transmission plate 251 may be made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property, or the rear transmission plate 251. The plate 261 may be made of a glass material. Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may be made of a translucent synthetic resin material.

(Modification 10)
Here, Modification Example 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 62A is a horizontal cross-sectional view showing a window unit as a modified example 8, FIG. 62B is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, and FIG. 62C is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit as another example. A front view and (D) are side views of (C).

As shown in FIG. 62A, when the tubular body 252A forming the tubular portion of the first transmissive body 250 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, for example, the first movable body 300 is used. In a state where the predetermined part of the movable body LED 350CL, 350CR mounted on the first movable body 300 is moved to the first effect position on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the light emitted outward is It passes through the cylindrical body 252A and is emitted to the left and right sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal the effect to not only the player who plays the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also the players around it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(B), for example, in a state where a predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 has moved to an effect position on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, above the window portion 51 of the opening/closing frame 50 ( Alternatively, the light emitted from the effect LEDs 9 provided on the left and right sides or below) may pass through the cylindrical body 252A and be emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space S. .. By doing so, it is possible to irradiate light from directly above (or directly beside or directly below) the first movable body 300 that has moved to the first effect position, so that the effect effect of the first movable body 300 can be further improved. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are separated from each other. A predetermined effect (for example, light emitted from the effect LED 9) from the side surface portion (cylindrical body 252A of FIG. 62) that connects the two passes through the cylindrical body 252A and reaches the first movable body 300 inside the space S. When the first movable body 300 is emitted, the first movable body 300 is light-emitted and decorated, and the decorative effect for decorating the first movable body 300 is executed. That is, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 can be decorated by the predetermined effect of the side surface portion (the cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62). Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, there are a plurality of types of execution patterns as the decoration effect. For example, the effect LED 9 is a full-color LED, and as shown in FIG. 62(B), the effect LED 9 can emit light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. Depending on the type of the light emission pattern (the type of decoration effect execution pattern), the expectation degree (eg, the jackpot expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state may be different. For example, the degree of expectation may be a relationship of blue (expectation degree: small)<green (expectation degree: medium)<red (expectation degree: large). According to this, the player is given a decorative effect (light emission effect of the first movable body 300 according to the degree of expectation by irradiating the first movable body 300 with light of blue, green, and red from the effect LED 9). Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, even if the entire tubular body 252A does not have a light-transmitting property, only a part thereof needs to have a light-transmitting property. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62C, the transparent window 258 is formed on a part of the peripheral surface (for example, the left and right side surfaces) of the cylindrical body 252A made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material. By arranging the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so that the display parts face the transparent window 258 when the display parts are moved to the effect position on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. The images displayed on the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y inside S may be made visible through the see-through window 258. By doing so, a predetermined effect that the image displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y that have moved to the display position can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, so that the effect effect is further improved. You can

(Modification 11)
As in a modified example 11 shown in FIG. 63, the second transmissive body 260 (second transmissive member) has a light incident portion 260a through which light can enter, and the gaming machine frame 3 (gaming machine main body) is The second transmissive body 260 has the LED 9a (light emitting component) arranged in the facing portion 3a that faces the light incident portion 260a of the second transmissive body 260, and the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) of the second transmissive body 260 is the light incident portion 260a from the LED 9a. Has a light guide part 260b capable of guiding light inside the cylindrical body 252A (side surface part), and the light from this light guide part 260b has a space part of the cylindrical body 252A (side surface part). The light may be emitted from the surface on the S side toward the first movable body 300. The cylindrical body 252A is, for example, a light guide member, and the light incident on the inside of the cylindrical body 252A can be emitted from the surface on the side of the space portion S. Further, a light blocking member 260c (incidence suppressing means) is provided at the tip of the tubular body 252A on the side of the first transmissive body 250, and the light incident on the inside of the tubular body 252A is the first transmissive body. It is designed not to be incident on 250. A reflecting member (incident suppressing means) may be provided instead of the light blocking member 260c.

According to the modified example 11, the LED 9a is arranged in the gaming machine frame 3, and the second transmissive body 260 of the opening/closing frame 50 that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 is configured to output the light incident from the LED 9a to the second transmitting body 260. It has a light guide part 260b that can be propagated inside the transmissive body 260 and guided to the tubular body 252A (side surface portion), and the light from the light guide portion 260b is transmitted from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to the first side. Since the light can be emitted toward the movable body 300, a decorative effect can be realized without electrically connecting the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 with a connection cable or the like. That is, it is not necessary to provide the opening/closing frame 50 with an electric component. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem that the electric wiring is caught when the opening/closing frame 50 is closed.

An LED 9a (light emitting component) is provided on the opening/closing frame 50 side, and the LED 9a on the opening/closing frame 50 side and a control board, a power supply board, etc. provided on the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine body) side are electrically connected by a connecting cable. May be connected to. According to this configuration, the open/close frame 50 includes the LED 9a (light emitting component) for causing the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to emit light. An optical path up to 252A (side surface portion) can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to dispose the LED 9a (light emitting component) on the gaming machine frame 3 (gaming machine body) side, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine frame 3 (gaming machine body) can be improved.

When the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, as shown in FIG. 63, a plurality of types of operations (for example, rotation of the first movable body 300) are performed. , Expansion, swing, deformation, etc.), and the execution pattern of the decoration effect is different according to the plurality of types of operations (a plurality of types according to rotation, expansion, swing, deformation of the first movable body 300). Light emission mode). In this case, it is possible to provide a variety of decorative effects. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the game area, a game area side light emitting component different from the light emitting component (for example, LED 9a shown in FIG. 63, etc.) (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, a normal winning ball device 6A or a normal variable) At least one of the light emitting component (LED) of the winning ball device 6B and the light emitting component (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light is arranged, and when performing the decorative effect, the game area. The side light emitting component may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower luminance than when the decorative effect is not being executed. In this case, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 can be made visible by the irradiation of light from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the opening/closing frame 50 is provided with a production LED 9 (opening/closing door side light emitting component) different from the LED 9a (light emitting component) shown in FIG. 63, and when performing a decorative production, the production LED 9 is turned off or the decorative production is performed. You may make it light-emit with a lower brightness|luminance than when not performing. In this case, when the decorative effect is executed, the effect LED 9 (opening/closing door side light-emitting component) of the opening/closing frame 50 is turned off or emitted at a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed. The first movable body 300 that has entered between the body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 is irradiated with light emitted from the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) through the light guide section 260b. The first movable body 300 is bright and the parts other than the window 51 of the opening/closing frame 50 are dark, so that the decoration effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the predetermined effect may be executable based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the mode of the predetermined effect may be changeable based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 12)
As in the modified example 12 shown in FIG. 64(A), the specific effect may be executable in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) that connects the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. According to the twelfth modified example, the effect of the effect can be improved by executing the specific effect on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) that connects the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Further, the specific effect on the side surface portion can be executed regardless of whether or not the first movable body 300 has advanced, but for example, the first movable body 300 is provided between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. By executing the specific effect on the side surface portion when entering, it is possible to provide a powerful movable object effect to the player. Further, when the movable body does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, by executing the specific effect on the side surface portion, it is possible to expect execution of the movable body effect or the like. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes image display means DP (for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, etc.) that displays an image as the specific effect. According to this, since the image display means DP provided on the side surface displays the image of the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. It should be noted that a projection unit (projector) for projecting an image is provided in place of the image display unit DP, and an image from this projection unit (projector) is projected onto the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) to form the cylindrical shape. The specific effect may be executable on the body 252A (side surface portion).

(Modification 13)
As in the modified example 13 shown in FIG. 64B, the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) is an image for guiding and displaying the image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light inside. Light guide display means (for example, light guide plate GP) may be provided. For example, the light that is incident on the tubular body 252A and guided inside the tubular body 252A is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the light guide display is performed on the light guide plate GP by the incident light. Light from a light emitting component (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR shown in FIG. 62) passes through the cylindrical body 252A and is incident on the light guide plate GP, and this incident light performs light guide display on the light guide plate GP. Anything will do. According to the modified example 13, since the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP) provided on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) guides and displays the image for the specific effect, the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

(Modification 14)
As in Modification 14 shown in FIG. 65(A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes a light guide member 260d capable of guiding incident light, and the light guide member 260d emits a plurality of lights. A portion 9b (a group of LEDs arranged in three rows in FIG. 65) and a corresponding area portion 260e (the corresponding area portion 260e arranged in three rows in FIG. 65) obtained by dividing the light guide member 260d into a plurality of portions corresponding to the respective light emitting portions 9b. ) And. The cylindrical body 252A itself may be the light guide member. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding area portion 260e in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) corresponding to the light emitting portion 9b emits light. For example, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding area portion 260e sequentially emits light from the far side to the near side of the player. On the contrary, the effect may be such that the player sequentially emits light from the near side to the far side. Note that the specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modified example 14, the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 65B, a plurality of types of light emission mode patterns (a pattern in which only the corresponding region portion 260e on the innermost side emits light, the innermost side and the innermost side) in which the light emission manner in the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) is stepwise different. There are three types of patterns in which the two corresponding intermediate area portions 260e in the middle emit light, and the patterns in which all the corresponding area portions 260e emit light), and the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state depends on the type of these light emission mode patterns. It may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern, the player can be made to pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, as the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, a specific light emission pattern in which at least one of the light emission color, the brightness, and the blinking interval is different), and the advantageous state is controlled according to the type of the specific light emission pattern The degree of expectation may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when executing a specific effect, the game area side light emitting components (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game board. At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part of the surface of 2 to emit light may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed, so that the specific effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the specific effect is executed, the open/close door side light emitting component (the effect LED 9 of the opening/closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the open/close door-side light emitting component of the open/close door (the effect LED 9 of the open/close frame 50) is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed. It is possible to make a particular effect stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, it is provided with a motion detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player, and based on the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detecting means (for example, the stick by the controller sensor unit 35A). The specific effect may be executable based on the operation detection of the controller 31A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, light from the image light guide display unit (for example, the light guide plate GP shown in FIG. 64B) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 65A) is transmitted to the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmission body 250. An incidence suppressing unit (for example, a light shielding member 260c or a reflecting member shown in FIG. 63) that suppresses incidence on at least one of the two transmissive bodies 260 may be provided. According to this, the image guide display means (for example, the light guide plate shown in FIG. 64(B)) by the incidence suppressing means (for example, the light shielding member 260c or the reflection member shown in FIG. 63, or the separating portion (gap portion)). GP) or the light from the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 65A) is suppressed from being incident on at least one of the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a part of the first transmissive body 250 or the second transmissive body 260 from becoming an unexpected light emission mode. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the window portion 51 may include a main body member to which the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are attachable/detachable. For example, the first transmissive body 250 is exposed to the player side, the first transmissive body 250 may be intentionally damaged by a malicious player, and is more easily damaged than the second transmissive body 260. Regarding the second transparent body 260, if the opening/closing frame 50 is opened while the first movable body 300 is advancing, the first movable body 300 may contact. As described above, since it is possible to replace the first transmissive body 250 or the second transmissive body 260 as a unit, it is not necessary to replace the entire window portion 51. Therefore, the cost of replacing the parts can be reduced, and the maintainability of the window 51 is excellent.

(Modification 15)
In Modification 14, in FIG. 65, the light emitting portions 9b are arranged in three horizontal rows and the corresponding region portions 260e are arranged in three horizontal rows. However, as in Modification 15 shown in FIG. The section 9b and the corresponding area section 260e in a plurality of columns may be provided. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portions 260e in a plurality of columns vertically emit light. For example, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding region portion 260e sequentially emits light from bottom to top. On the contrary, an effect of sequentially emitting light from top to bottom may be used. Note that the specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modified example 15, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Modification 16)
Next, Modification 16 will be described based on FIG. 67. 67A is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit according to Modification 16, and FIG. 67B is a front view showing an effect mode of light guide plate effect. In this modification 16, an example in which the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 function as light guide plates will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B), the front transmission plate 251 reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 290, which is incident inside from the left and right side end faces, forward and emits it from the front face. A light emitting region E1 forming a predetermined light guide pattern, that is, a light emitting region E1 that emits light by the light incident inside the front transmission plate 251 (see a halftone dot region in FIG. 67B) and left and right side end surfaces. And a non-light-emitting region in which a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 290 that has entered the inside from the front and emits it from the front surface is formed.

The rear transmission plate 261 is provided on the first movable body 300, and forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 291 that is incident inside from the side end surface of the hole 270 to the front side and emits the light from the front side. Light-emitting region E2, that is, the light-emitting region E2 that emits light by the light that has entered the rear transmission plate 261 (see the hatched region in FIG. 67B), and the light has entered from the side end surface of the hole 270. And a non-light-emitting region in which a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting the light from the light guide plate LED 291 forward and emitting it from the front surface is not formed.

The light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed on the back side in a fine concavo-convex state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LEDs 290 and 291 which is incident inside from the end faces to be emitted from the front face. Specifically, the light emitting areas E1 and E2 are formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side (detailed). (Not shown).

When light enters from the end faces of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 are given a predetermined pattern by a dot pattern formed of a plurality of recesses formed in the light emitting regions E1 and E2. An image (still image) is displayed (see the halftone dot area and the shaded area in FIG. 67B).

As shown in the present modification 16, the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 and the rear transmission plate 261 of the second transmission body 260 are light guide plates that guide the light incident from the end faces to emit the surface light. By functioning, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable body effect. In particular, even when the movable body has moved to the effect position where the predetermined portion is on the front side of the rear transmissive plate 261, it is possible to produce the movable object by causing the light emitting area E1 to emit light in front of it.

Further, by allowing the light emitting area E1 and the light emitting area E2 behind the light emitting area E1 to emit light, the light emitting areas E1 and E2 corresponding to the front and rear positions of the movable body can emit light. It is possible to perform a light emission effect at a position closer to. In addition, since the front and rear depth feeling can be generated by causing the light emitting areas E1 and E2 to emit light at the same time, the effect of production is improved.

Further, in the present modified example 16, the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the movable body can be made to enter from the end surface of the hole 270, so that the first transmissive body 250 attached to the opening/closing frame 50 side and Since it is not necessary to provide a light-emitting body on the second transparent body 260 and it is not necessary to draw the wiring from the gaming machine frame 3 side on which the effect control board 12 is mounted, it is possible to avoid complication of the wiring work. The light emitting area E2 may be made to emit light by the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the window unit 51A side. Further, although the light emitting areas E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, they may be provided on only one of them.

Also, in the present modification 16, an example in which the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 has been described, but the tubular portion guides the light incident from the end face. You may make it function as a light guide body which carries out surface emission. In this case, the tubular portion is made of a transparent member having a light-transmitting property, and light is incident from the front end or the rear end of the tubular portion so that the light emitting region provided in a part of the outer peripheral surface emits light. You can do this.

(Modification 17)
As in a modified example 17 shown in FIG. 68, a movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the movable light guide plate MGP is connected to the first position P1 of the first movable body 300. It can be located at a third position P3 between the second position P2 and the first movable body 300 does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 when moving to the second position P2. It may be movable to four positions P4. For example, the movable light guide plate MGP is a light guide plate (transparent rendering means) that performs light guide display by guiding light inside, and the third position P3 and the fourth position P4 are provided by a light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown). You can move with and. As shown in FIG. 68, the fourth position P4 is closer to the first transparent body 250 than the second position P2. The light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown) includes a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor (determination means) that detect the position of the movable light guide plate MGP.

In the movable body effect execution process (S347G) of the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71). When it is determined that it is the movement timing (S71; Yes), the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP from the third position P3 to the fourth position P4 is started (S72). After the processing of S72, it is determined whether or not the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73). When the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the detection signal of the fourth position sensor, and based on the detection signal from the fourth position sensor, the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to the fourth position P4. Can be determined. When the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73; Yes), the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 is started (S74), and the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2. The operation at the second position P2 is executed (S75).

On the other hand, when the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4 (S73; No), the operation of the first movable body 300 is limited (S76). If the detection signal from the fourth position sensor is not turned on after a predetermined first time has elapsed from the start of moving the movable light guide plate MGP, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable light guide plate MGP has It may be determined that the fourth position P4 has not been reached. In addition, the second time period from the start of the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 (however, the second time period is shorter than the first time period and includes the time period away from the third position P3) is If the detection signal from the third position sensor does not turn off after the elapse, the movable light guide plate MGP remains at the third position P3 and the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4. You may judge.

As the contents of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S76), as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1, and the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2. May be stopped, the operation of the first movable body 300 may be stopped, or the like.

After the processing of S76, the light guide plate operation abnormality flag indicating that the movable light guide plate MGP is in operation abnormality is set to ON (S77). In addition, when it is not the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71; No), after the processing of S75, or after the processing of S77, the movable body effect execution processing ends.

According to the modification 17, when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it can be moved to the fourth position P4 that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP is closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the second position P2, the movable light guide plate MGP has entered between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Since the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to the fourth position P4 on the front side of the second position P2, it is possible to provide a movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP have advanced. The effect of can be improved.

Since the movable light guide plate MGP is a transparent rendering means that guides light by guiding light internally, the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP can improve the effect of rendering. For example, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and the first movable body 300 is located at the first position P1, that is, the movable light guide plate MGP is in front of the first movable body 300 at the first position P1. When it is located on the side, a movable body effect can be executed by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP and the first movable body 300 located behind the movable light guide plate MGP, thus providing a powerful movable body effect to the player. can do. Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4 and the first movable body 300 is located at the second position P2, that is, the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP that has advanced and the first light object that has advanced behind it. Since the movable body effect can be executed by the movable body 300, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

When the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first position P1 instead of moving the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from contacting the immovable movable light guide plate MGP, and prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP. Further, since the first movable body 300 operates at the first position P1, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort with respect to the movable body effect.

If the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 may not be moved to the second position P2, or the first movable body 300 may be stopped. It is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from contacting the immovable movable light guide plate MGP and prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP.

In addition, the expectation level (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state may be different when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and when it is located at the fourth position P4. .. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B light emitting component. (LED), at least one of the light emitting components (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to be turned off, or more than when the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. You may make it light-emit with low brightness. According to this, the movable body effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the effect LED 9 (opening/closing door side light-emitting component) of the opening/closing frame 50 is turned off or when the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. May emit light with low brightness. According to this, the movable body effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the second movement of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the movement of the player by the movement detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). Moving to the position P2 may be possible. According to this, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 18)
In Modification 17, the fourth position P4 is closer to the first transparent body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in Modification 18 shown in FIG. 70, the fourth position P4 may be a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300. Even when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) is a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modification 18, the first movable body 300 is in the second position. It is possible to provide a movable body effect in which the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to P2 and is located at the fourth position P4 away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, and the effect of the effect can be improved. ..

In addition, since the movable body production can be executed by arranging the first movable body 300 that has advanced to the second position and the transparent production means that has moved to a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, the player can be executed. It is possible to provide a powerful moving body effect to.

In addition, although not particularly shown, as the support portion that is provided in a region other than the window portion 51 of the open/close frame 50 and supports the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, which are tubular portions, for example, the open/close frame 50. Since the tubular portion is supported by the LED cover serving as the support portion by providing the LED cover that is provided on the front surface of the LED light source and that forms the light emitting portion that emits light by the effect LED 9, it is possible to suppress damage and fraud.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion is arranged so as to close the opening on the front side of the tubular portion, and the entire area of the game area 10 can be visually seen through the front transmission plate 251. However, the front transmission plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion is composed of a first plate-shaped portion that closes the front opening of the tubular portion and a second plate-shaped portion that is arranged outside the tubular portion. It may be configured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 is exemplified to be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following modified examples 19 and 16 are provided. The front transmission plate 251 may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261 as shown in FIG. Further, only a part of the front transmission plate 251 may be inclined and the other parts may be arranged in parallel.

(Modification 19)
Here, Modification Example 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 71(A) and 71(B) are vertical cross-sectional views showing a window unit according to Modification 19. FIG.

As in Modification 9 shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the front transmission plate 251 includes a first plate-shaped portion 251A that closes an opening on the front side of a cylindrical body 252A as a cylindrical portion, and a cylindrical body. The second plate-shaped portion 251B may be arranged outside the 252A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 71A, the first plate-shaped portion 251A is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, and the second plate-shaped portion 251B is arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. May be. Further, as shown in FIG. 71B, both the first plate-shaped portion 251A and the second plate-shaped portion 251B may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R arranged below the first movable body 300 are positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 even when moved to the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to incline rearward downward, The movable body 300 is movable to the front side until a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 side than the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261, and the second movable body is provided. Even if 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are movable to the front side through a hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261, the predetermined portion is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261. Good.

In this case, the first predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is located in front of the predetermined portions of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R in a state where each movable body is moved to the effect position. It is preferable to be located at. By doing so, the movement amounts of the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L, 500R) can be made different according to the inclination of the front transmission plate 251. ..

Further, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are located below the player's line of sight when moving to the effect position, the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. When moving to, there is a possibility that the movable body that has moved to the effect position may make it difficult to see the game area 10 below the movable body (particularly, the starting winning opening and the special winning opening). Therefore, as described above, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R below the first movable body 300 should be moved so as not to project to the front side of the first movable body 300 at the effect position. Thus, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lower game area 10 from being lowered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion has the front surface formed in a flat surface shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-flat surface shape (for example, Curved surface or spherical surface).

(Modification 20)
Next, a modified example 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 72A is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state where the window unit of Modification 20 is located at the first visual recognition position, and FIG. 72B is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the state where the window unit is moved to the second visual recognition position. It is a figure.

In the above-described embodiment, the window unit 51A is illustrated as being immovably provided with the tubular portion projecting forward with respect to the opening/closing frame 50, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, like the first transmission body 250 of the window unit 51B of Modification 10, the front transmission plate 251 is substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261 at a position apart from the rear transmission plate 261 in the front direction. Between the first visual recognition position (see FIG. 72(A)) and the second visual recognition position (see FIG. 72(B)) whose upper end is inclined forward with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIG. 72(B)). It may be provided so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 280 provided in the left and right direction.

In this case, the first transparent body 250, which is a part of the window unit 51B, is provided so as to project toward the player from the first visible position to the second visible position. It is difficult to understand that the body 250 has moved to the second visual recognition position. However, when the first movable body 300 moves forward in response to the movement of the first transparent body 250 to the second visual recognition position, it becomes easier to recognize that the first transparent body 250 has moved. More specifically, for example, when the tilt angle of the front transmission plate 251 is changed, the incident angle of the light emitted from the movable body LED 350A to the front transmission plate 251 is changed, whereby the back surface of the front transmission plate 251 is changed. The amount of light reflected by increases, the front surface of the game area 10 at the rear is illuminated, and the amount of light emitted at the front is reduced, so that the visibility of the game area 10 from the player side is improved.

In addition, the first movable body 300 also returns to the rear side according to the movement of the first transparent body 250 from the second visual recognition position to the first visual recognition position, so that the effect of production is improved. Moreover, the light reflected by the front transmission plate 251 also changes when the incident angle of the external light R with respect to the front transmission plate 251 changes, and the first movable body 300 and the game area 10 are visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. By changing the mode, it becomes easier to recognize that the first transparent body 250 has moved forward.

Moreover, since the movable body also pops out to the player side together with the first transparent body 250, it is possible to give an impact. Furthermore, since the lower side of the first transparent body 250 does not move, it is possible to avoid obstructing other parts (for example, throwing the game ball into the upper plate 90 below).

In the modification 20, as shown in FIG. 72, a transparent member operation effect of moving only the first transparent body 250 to the player side can be executed, but in addition to this, the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are also available. It may be possible to execute a transparent member operation effect in which both and are operated on the player side.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modified example 20 shown in FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether the pattern is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the variation pattern is the super reach B (S501; Yes), the type of frame motion effect is determined (S501A). For example, in the process of S501A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the frame action effect determination random number and uses the extracted numerical data and the frame action effect determination table shown in FIG. 73(B). Then, it is determined whether to execute the frame motion effect, and the motion pattern in the case of execution.

As shown in FIG. 73(B), in the case of the super-reach B (miss) variation pattern, "one transparent member operation pattern (only the first transparent body 250 projects)" is determined with a probability of 70%, and "both The transparent member operation pattern (the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are projected)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super-reach B (big hit) variation pattern, "one transparent member operation pattern (only the first transparent body 250 projects)" is determined with a probability of 30%, and "both transparent member operation pattern ( "The first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 project") is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the frame operation effect by both transparent member operation patterns is easier to be executed than in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern, and the frame operation by both transparent member operation patterns is performed. You can have the expectation of a big hit in the production, and the enjoyment of the game improves. In addition, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the one-side transmissive member operation pattern is executed, so that a big hit is also expected for the frame operation effect by the one-side transmissive member operation pattern (only the first transmissive body 250 projects). You can have a feeling, and the enjoyment of the game improves.

After the processing of S501A, the presence/absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 73(C). Then, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is to be executed and, if it is to be executed, the operation pattern thereof.

As shown in FIG. 73(C), in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with “execution is performed”, the “second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)” is 20%. It is determined with a probability of “execution is performed”, and ““the second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the first operation ACT1 and then the second operation ACT2)” is more than that in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern. The effect is easily executed, and the first movable object 300 can have an expectation of a big hit about the movable object effect in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect that executes ACT1, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executable not only in the variation pattern of super reach B but also in the variation pattern of super reach A. Further, the variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, in the determination of the movable body effect, the determination rate may be set such that the higher the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. The determination rate may be set to be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of times of pseudo-variation.

Returning to FIG. 73(A), after the process of S502, it is determined whether or not there is a movable body effect (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. If it is determined in S501 that it is not the super reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modified example 20, at least the first transparent body 250 is allowed to move to the player side, and the transparent member operation effect can be executed. By executing this transparent member operation effect, the first movable body 300 is changed to the first transparent object. Since it is movable between 250 and the second transparent body 260, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the transparent member operation effect is an effect in which only the first transparent body 250 is operated on the player side, or both the first transparent object 250 and the second transparent object 260 are operated on the player side. It is possible to provide a powerful transparent member operation effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As the transparent member operation effect, only the first transparent body 250 is moved to the player side, while the transparent member operation pattern and both the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are moved to the player side. There are both transparent member operation patterns, and since one transparent member operation pattern and both transparent member operation patterns have different expectations (for example, big hit expectations) that are controlled to an advantageous state, the player can be used as a transparent member operation effect. Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 is set to the first transparent body 250 based on the execution of the transparent member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be movable between the second transparent body 260 and the second transparent body 260. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a first operation pattern in which the transparent member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 moves between the first transparent object 250 and the second transparent object 260, and a transparent member operation effect is executed and the first movable object is moved. A second motion pattern in which the body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be executable. In this case, it is possible to give a variation to the movable body effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is different between the first motion pattern and the second motion pattern, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the transparent member operation effect is executed, the game area side light emitting parts (for example, the light emitting parts (LED) of the center decoration frame 52, the light emitting parts (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game) At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part of the surface of the board 2 to emit light may be turned off or may be made to emit light at a lower luminance than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the transparent member operation effect is executed, the opening/closing door side light emitting component (the effect LED 9 of the opening/closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light at a lower luminance than when the transparent member operation effect is not executed. Good. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, when the transparent member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component of the window 51 may be turned on or may be made to emit light at a higher brightness than when the transparent member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, a detection means (for example, a first transparent body position sensor) for detecting that the first transparent body 250 has moved to the player side is provided, and it is detected that the first transparent body 250 has moved to the player side. In this case, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be executed. In this case, a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 after the first transparent body 250 operates toward the player are appropriate. Can be executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved. Further, when the first transparent body 250 is not operating on the player side, the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the first transparent body 250 and the first transparent body 250 are not moved. 1 It is possible to prevent the movable body 300 from being damaged.

(Modification 21)
As in Modification 21 shown in FIG. 74, the open/close frame 50 (frame body) includes operable frame side movable bodies SL and SR (frame side movable means). The frame-side movable bodies SL and SR can be displaced by a frame-side movable body drive mechanism (not shown) into a non-projected state shown by a broken line in FIG. 75(A) and a projected state shown by a solid line in FIG. 75(A). Is becoming In addition, a frame interlocking effect (simply referred to as interlocking effect) in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are operated in association with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. In some cases). In this frame interlocking effect, an effect in which the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the operation of the frame side movable bodies SL, SR are started are combined. Is becoming That is, the first movement ACT2 of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 and the movement of the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR to the protruding state shown by the solid line in FIG. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect that is excellent in interlocking feeling when the operation starts.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modified example 21 shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether the pattern is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the variation pattern is the super reach B (S501; Yes), the presence/absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 76(B). Then, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is to be executed and, if it is to be executed, the operation pattern thereof.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is”, and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with “execution is performed”, the “second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)” is 20%. It is determined with a probability of “execution is performed”, and ““the second action pattern PTB-2 (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is more easily executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the first operation ACT1 and then the second operation ACT2)” is more than that in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern. The effect is easily executed, and the first movable object 300 can have an expectation of a big hit about the movable object effect in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect that executes ACT1, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executable not only in the variation pattern of super reach B but also in the variation pattern of super reach A. Further, the variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, in the determination of the movable body effect, the determination rate may be set such that the higher the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. The determination rate may be set to be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of times of pseudo-variation.

After the processing of S502, it is determined whether or not there is a movable body effect (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504).

After the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A). When it is determined to be the second operation pattern PTB-2 (S504A; Yes), the type of the frame-side movable body effect that is the effect that the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR operate is determined (S504B). For example, in the processing of S504B, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the frame-side movable-body effect determination random numbers, and also extracts the numerical data and the frame-side movable-object effect determination shown in FIG. 76(C). Using the table, it is determined whether or not the frame-side movable body effect is to be executed and, if it is to be executed, the operation pattern thereof.

As shown in FIG. 76C, in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern, the “non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)” is determined with a probability of 80%, and the “interlocking pattern ( The first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are interlocked)" is determined with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the “non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)” is determined with a probability of 20%, and the “interlocking pattern (first movable body 300)” is determined. And the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are interlocked)" is determined with a probability of 80%. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the frame operation effect by the interlocking pattern is more easily executed than in the case of the super reach B (miss) variation pattern, and the first movable body 300 and the frame side movable body SL , SR can be interlocked, you can have a sense of expectation of a big hit, the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, it is possible to have an expectation of a big hit also in the non-interlocking effect in which only the first movable body 300 operates without the frame side movable bodies SL and SR operating. , Interest in games is improved.

After the processing of S504B, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. If it is determined in S501 that it is not the super reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modified example 21, it is possible to execute a frame interlocking effect of operating the frame side movable means of the frame body in association with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful frame-linked effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, the interlocked pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and the non-interlocked pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means. Can be performed, so that the frame-linked effect can have variations, and the interest of the frame-linked effect can be improved. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, since the interlocked pattern and the non-interlocked pattern have different expectations (for example, a jackpot expectation) controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frame interlocking effect. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, since the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the operation of the frame side movable means is started are matched, both operations are started. It is possible to provide a frame-linked effect with an excellent feeling of interlocking. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

The timing of returning the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing of returning the state before the operation of the frame-side movable means may be matched. In this case, it is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect that is excellent in interlocking feeling when both operations are completed. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, at least a part of the operating means of the frame body (for example, the hitting ball operating handle HB shown in FIG. 74). It is also possible to be able to execute a frame-linked effect in which is operated. Here, as shown in FIG. 75(B), at least a part of the hitting operation handle HB is projected. Note that the operation of the operation means may be, for example, at least one operation of at least one of the operation means (for example, the hitting ball operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74) selected from vibration, rocking, advancing, retracting and moving. .. According to this, since the operation of the operation means is directly transmitted to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a more powerful frame-linked effect. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operation means is not limited to the hit ball operation handle HB, but may be a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like.

Further, the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 based on the detection of the movement of the player by the movement detecting means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be possible to enter. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 22)
As in the modified example 22 shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, and the first transmissive body 250. And when located between the second transmissive body 260 and the second transmissive body 260. For example, in the first movable body 300, the upper portion of the first movable body 300 can advance upward, the lower portion of the first movable body 300 can advance downward, and the first movable body 300 can expand vertically. It is what Specifically, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, for example, at the first position P1, the hole 270 of the second transparent body 260 (FIG. 24). The vertical length LW is smaller than the opening diameter (the vertical length LY of the opening) of the hole 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 shown in FIG. Is LX (however, each length is LY>LX>LW) and is located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, the opening diameter of the hole portion 270 (the opening The vertical length LZ is greater than the vertical length LY). For example, the first movable body 300 is expanded to the length LZ in the vertical direction after coming out from the hole 270. When the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first movable body 300 may move from the first position P1 to the second position P2 at a constant speed. The velocity may gradually increase until it enters the portion 270, and after entering the hole 270, the velocity may move at a higher speed.

According to the modified example 22, when the size of the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, when the size of the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Since it is different when it is located between, it is possible to improve the movable body effect. In particular, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, it is smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, but the first movable body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are smaller. Since it is larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270 when it is located between and, it is possible to show the enlarged first movable body 300 on the player side, and it is possible to provide a more powerful movable body effect. it can.

(Modification 23)
As in the modified example 23 shown in FIG. 78, the first movable body 300 becomes smaller when entering the hole 270 of the second transparent body 260, and the first movable body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are The size thereof is larger than that of the hole 270 both when it is not located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. For example, the first movable body 300 has a length LZ in the vertical direction when it is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 (for example, at the first position P1), and The length in the vertical direction when located between the transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (for example, in the second position P2) is also LZ, and both are larger than the hole portion 270 (the hole portion 270). The opening diameter of 270 (larger than the vertical length LY of the opening) If the first movable body 300 is larger than the hole portion 270, the first position P1 is the same as the second position P2. It does not have to be the size.

According to the modified example 23, the first movable body 300, which has been larger than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, once becomes smaller than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, passes through the hole portion 270, and reaches the second position P2. Since it is larger than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, it is possible to provide a movable body effect that is unexpected in change. Therefore, the movable body effect can be improved.

In Modifications 22 and 23, the first movable body 300 is expanded in the vertical direction, but it may be expanded in at least one of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, or the like. Good. Further, at least a part of the first movable body 300 is configured to be rotatable about the advancing direction as a rotation axis. When the first movable body 300 is rotated clockwise, the first movable body 300 is expanded to the outer peripheral side by the clockwise rotation (for example, the first movable body 300). (1) The blade portion of the movable body 300 is advanced in the radial direction or the circumferential direction, etc., and when it is rotated counterclockwise on the contrary, the outer peripheral side is contracted by the counterclockwise rotation (for example, the first The blade portion of the movable body 300 may be housed in the rotation center direction, the circumferential direction, or the like).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y operably provided, and the effect display device 5X. , And a production control CPU 120 for controlling 5Y, and the window portion 51 is provided with a first transparent body 250 and a hole portion 270 arranged closer to the game area 10 than the first transparent body 250. The effect control CPU 120, which has the second transmission body 260, controls the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a standby state at a position on the rear surface side of the rear transmission plate 261 with a predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y behind. It is possible to execute the third control via the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261 to move it to the front side until it is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261.

By doing so, it is possible to move a predetermined portion of the effect display device 5X, 5Y to a position closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260. Since it is possible for the person to make an impact, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be moved to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 in a state where the display unit is slightly inclined so as to face the center side. By doing so, the movements of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be appropriately viewed.

Moreover, after performing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a direction (left-right direction) that intersects the moving direction (front-rear direction) in the third control. Control can be executed. By doing so, the display content of the display section can be visually recognized by anyone other than the player.

Further, as described above, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged to face the front side of the board plate 200 so that the game balls can flow down between the game board surface 200A and the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole portion 270 is formed at a position corresponding to the effect area (the opening 2c formed in the board 200) that does not correspond to the flow area of the game ball in the game area 10. In other words, there is a limit to making the hole 270 large because it is necessary to secure the flow-down area of the game ball, and in order to allow the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to pass through the hole 270, the effect display device 5X, 5Y cannot be larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the third control for moving the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side, at least a part (the whole in the present embodiment) of a predetermined part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is By performing the fourth control in which the hole 270 is moved in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the moving direction (front direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transparent body 260, without making the hole 270 larger than necessary, Moreover, since the display portions of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be shown at a position closer to the front side of the player than the rear transmission plate 261, the player can be provided with a powerful effect.

Further, in order to move the left and right effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side through the hole 270, they are first moved toward the center and then passed through the hole 270, so that the hole 270 should be made larger than necessary. Instead, it is possible to allow the production display devices 5X and 5Y to pass through. After passing through the hole portion 270, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be further moved in the left-right direction, so that the position of the hole portion 270 is not limited and a desired position (for example, a central effect display). The image displayed on the display unit can be shown at a position where it does not hinder the visibility of the device 5A or at a position where it is hidden. Further, after the movement, since the effect display device 5A is located behind the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged in front of the game area 10 by executing the third control, for example, not only notification of left-handed or right-handed, but also a predetermined position is provided. It is possible to display a notification image or the like for aiming and launching a game ball toward the winning area thus obtained, from the front side of the gaming area 10 and near the aiming point.

Further, a rail member (not shown) that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y produces effects when changing from the standby state to the first operation state and when changing from the first operation state to the second operation state. It functions as a contact prevention unit that prevents the display devices 5X and 5Y from contacting the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X, 5Y and the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260 from coming into contact and being damaged.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the display device, the form in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y which are provided auxiliary to the side of the effect display device 5A capable of variable display of effect symbols are applied is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display device may be directed to the effect display device 5A, or a display device for effect provided separately from the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y (for example, movable display device). Display device mounted on the body or the like). Further, not limited to the display device for the production connected to the production control board 12 in this way, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold display device 25A. , Various display devices connected to the main board 11, such as the second hold display 25B and the universal figure hold display 25C.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the third control, the form in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, The display mode of the display screen is changed in accordance with the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (for example, the image is enlarged in accordance with the forward movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, or the design or the character is displayed). By performing display control (such as moving or changing the background color), it is possible to improve the effect by moving the display device and changing the display image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operation state, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are entirely located in front of the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a predetermined portion (for example, a display portion) of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the fourth control, after the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved in the left-right direction, the display unit is rotated so as to face outward, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be rotated along the front transmission plate 251. By doing so, the display units are closer to the player. It is possible to get closer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are exemplified to be provided so as to be movable substantially parallel to the front, rear, left and right directions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third control. May be moved so as to incline upward or downward in the front-rear direction. Further, in the fourth control, it may be moved upward or downward.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which only the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display devices 5A and others. The display device may be moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y as movable bodies are exemplified as being provided on the back side of the game board 2 in the non-operating state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A of the board plate 200.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged at positions corresponding to the flow-down area of the game balls in the game area 10 when viewed from the front after execution of the fourth control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after execution of the fourth control, when viewed from the front, other than the position corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10 (the position corresponding to the effect area), That is, it is preferable to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y within the area corresponding to the hole 270.

Further, by doing so, as described as an example of the movable body in FIG. 40, for example, an operation error occurs during operation of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, that is, during execution of the third control and the fourth control. Even if, for example, the need arises to open the open/close frame 50 and perform maintenance, the open/close frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transparent plate 261, so the rear transparent plate 261 and the effect display device. It is possible to prevent the 5X and 5Y from being damaged.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved within the area corresponding to the hole 270, the opening/closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the opening/closing frame 50 does not come into contact with the second transmitting body when opening/closing.

For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting opening of the opening/closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11, and the main board 11 detects opening of the opening/closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. Based on this, the door opening designation command indicating that the opening/closing frame 50 has been opened is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the standby position when the door opening designation command is received while executing the third control or the fourth control. Good.

According to this, for example, while performing the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, an operation abnormality of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y occurs, and the effect display devices 5X, 5Y are generated. Even if it is necessary to open the open/close frame 50 for maintenance due to immobilization on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 or ball clogging in the game area 10, Since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y retreat toward a position (for example, a standby position) where the effect display devices 5X and 5Y do not contact with the rear transmission plate 261 when opened, the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are prevented from being damaged. it can.

Furthermore, when opening and closing the opening and closing frame 50, even if the game ball that has stayed in a beaded state due to a ball clogging drops due to the third control, it is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261; that is, in front of the game area 10. Since the effect display devices 5X, 5Y that have been moving can be avoided to collide with the effect display devices 5X, 5Y by retracting to the standby position side, the effect display devices 5X by collision with the game balls. , 5Y can be prevented from being damaged, or the game ball can be prevented from bouncing due to the collision with the effect display devices 5X and 5Y and entering the back side of the board 200 through the opening 2c of the board 200.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control issues a door opening designation command when executing the first control or the second control of the first movable body 300 or the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When received, not only the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved to the standby position, but also the effect display that is being executed is interrupted, and at least the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are stopped. Until the rear transmission plate 261 is moved to the rear side, a notification for restricting the opening of the opening/closing frame 50 is output (for example, a sound "Do not open the opening/closing frame" is output or a message is displayed on the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, etc. May be displayed).

Further, a lock mechanism or the like for locking the open/close frame 50 in a closed state is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 causes the first control and the second control of the first movable body 300, or the third control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Alternatively, when the door open-time designation command is received while executing the fourth control, the opening of the open/close frame 50 may be restricted by locking by the lock mechanism.

(A1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The movable body moves between the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and a first motion that moves to a first position where the movable body does not enter between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. The second operation of moving to the second position can be performed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51). The first motion ACT1 moving to the first position and the second motion ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed).
The operation speed is different between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the first speed V1 in the first operation and the second speed V2 in the second operation are different). ).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A2) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine or the like),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.),
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The movable body moves between the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and a first motion that moves to a first position where the movable body does not enter between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. The second operation of moving to the second position can be performed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51). The first motion ACT1 moving to the first position and the second motion ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed).
The first operation and the second operation differ in the light-emission mode of the light-emission means associated with the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the first light-emission mode I1 in the first operation and the second light-emission mode in the second operation). Different from the second light emission mode I2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A3) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Sound output means capable of outputting effect sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The movable body moves between the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and a first motion that moves to a first position where the movable body does not enter between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. The second operation of moving to the second position can be performed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51). The first motion ACT1 moving to the first position and the second motion ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed).
The effect sound of the sound output means accompanying the operation is different between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52C, a first effect sound mode in the first operation ACT1 (for example, volume Vo1). ) And a second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second action ACT2 are different).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
Display means capable of executing the display effect (for example, effect display device 5A, etc.) is arranged so as to be visible through the window,
The movable body can be located at a position that does not overlap the display means or at an origin position where a part of the movable body overlaps the display means, and can move from the origin position to the first position or the second position. There may be.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
Specific game information display means (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) for displaying specific game information regarding the game regardless of the position of the movable body (for example, , The specific game information display area 5Z in FIG. 1) may be provided.
According to this configuration, not only can a powerful movable body effect be provided, but also specific game information related to the game, that is, game information important to the player, can be constantly shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent important game information from becoming invisible in the movable body effect.

(A6) In the gaming machine of (A1) above,
The operation speed of the second operation may be higher than the operation speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52A is higher than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A7) In the gaming machine of (A1) above,
The operation speed of the second operation may be lower than the operation speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52A is lower than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce failures due to the second operation of the movable body.

(A8) In the gaming machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body,
The second operation may have a lower emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 52B is smaller than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the glare when approaching the player side.

(A9) In the gaming machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body,
The light emission brightness of the light emitting means may be higher in the second operation than in the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 52B is higher than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player dazzling when approaching the player side, and it is possible to provide a light-emitting effect with an impact.

(A10) In the gaming machine of (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of the volume of the effect sound of the sound output unit being higher than the case of the first operation, the pitch being high, and the tempo being fast can be executed (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 52(C) may be larger than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A11) In the gaming machine of (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of that the volume of the effect sound of the sound output unit is lower, the pitch is lower, and the tempo is slower than that in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 52(C) may be smaller than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A11) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3);
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
The first opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened while the movable body is operating is different from the second opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened when the movable body is not operating. You may
According to this configuration, when the opening/closing door is notified, an appropriate treatment can be performed according to whether or not the movable body is operating.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A12) above,
A control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the movable body,
The control means is
First control for moving a predetermined portion of the movable body to the first transmission member side through the hole or the notch until it is located closer to the first transmission member side than the second transmission member (for example, effect) The control CPU 120 controls the first movable body 300 in the first standby position so that the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 is the rear transmission plate via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. 261 that can execute the first control of moving to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side),
After executing the first control, second control for moving at least a part of the predetermined portion in a direction intersecting with the moving direction in the first control (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the first control). After that, the first protrusion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302, intersects with the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control (front). The second protrusion that is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 after the second control that can be moved upward) and the first control is performed. A portion capable of executing second control for moving the portion 304 in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control),
It is possible to do so.
According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the movable body to the first transmission member side, at least a part of the predetermined portion is moved in the first control on the first transmission member side with respect to the second transmission member. By performing the second control of moving in a direction different from the direction, the player can be given an impact, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A14) In the gaming machine of (A13) above,
At least a part of the predetermined portion moves in a direction different from the game area in the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302 in the second control). The first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304, which is a part, may be moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control.
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body in the second control can be appropriately viewed.

(A15) In the gaming machine of (A13) or (A14) above,
Supporting means for supporting the movable body according to the movement of the movable body (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R that support the first movable body 300, and the second movable body In the operation mode, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R that support the first movable body 300 may be provided.
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body and the posture after the movement can be stabilized.

(A16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A15) above,
The second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) is provided, and the control is performed. The means can perform control to move the second movable body to the movable body so that the second movable body can be united after performing the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first control and then performs the first control). The second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, etc. can be controlled to move so that they can be combined with one movable body 300).
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body support each other by uniting, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

(A17) In the gaming machine of (A16) above,
When the second movable body is combined with the movable body, at least a part of the second movable body is arranged closer to the game area than the second transparent member (for example, the second movable body in the second operation mode). When the movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode, these second The movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIGS. 35 and 36)). You may
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body are located at different positions in the moving direction of the movable body in the first control when combined, a sense of depth can be generated.

(A18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A17) above,
The window portion (for example, the window portion 51) can open and close the game area (for example, the game area 10) (see FIG. 3),
The movable body may not come into contact with the second transparent member when opening and closing the window portion (see FIG. 40 ).
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmitting member from being damaged.

(A19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A18) above,
The movable body is provided with a light emitting unit (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR) capable of irradiating light other than the first transmissive member after performing the first control. (See FIG. 38).
With this configuration, it is possible to appeal the effect to not only the player but also the surroundings.

(A20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A19) above,
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) having a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, the gaming area 10),
An opening and closing frame (for example, the opening and closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51),
An opening/closing door-side light emitting component (for example, a production LED 9) provided in a region of the opening/closing frame other than the window portion,
A light emission control unit (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that controls light emission of the light emitting component on the opening/closing door side,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body). A portion in which the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 can be changed to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operation of the movable bodies 600L and 600R (see FIG. 37).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body can be appropriately produced.

(A21) In the gaming machine of (A20) above,
The light emission control means reduces the brightness after performing the first control as compared with before performing the first control (for example, the production control CPU 120 causes the production LED 9 to emit light in the first emission mode). After that, a portion for performing control so that light is emitted in the second light emission mode, which has a lower brightness than the first light emission mode.
38)).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the movable body.

(A22) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A21) above,
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) having a gaming board (for example, the gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, the gaming area 10),
An opening and closing frame (for example, the opening and closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51),
An opening/closing door-side light emitting component (for example, a production LED 9) provided in a region of the opening/closing frame other than the window portion,
A light emission control unit (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that controls light emission of the light emitting component on the opening/closing door side,
The opening/closing door-side light emitting component is provided so as to be able to emit light toward the movable body after performing the first control (for example, the production LED 9 is the first movable body after performing the first control). It is provided so that light can be emitted toward 300. See FIG. 62B of Modification 10).
According to this configuration, the movable body can be highlighted by the light.

(A23) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A22) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a warp passage 800) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided,
In the guide passage, at least a part of the guide passage has the first permeation through the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the cutout portion rather than the second transmission member (for example, the second transmissive body 260). It may be positioned on the side of the member (for example, the first transmission body 250) (see FIG. 61A of Modification 7).
According to this configuration, the game medium comes to flow down at a position close to the first transparent member, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(A24) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A13) to (A23) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a first warp passage 800A, a second warp passage 800B, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided, and the guide passage is , Moving toward the first transparent member side until at least a part of the guide passage is located closer to the first transparent member side than the second transparent member via the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the cutout portion This may be possible (see FIGS. 61B and 61C of the modified example 9).
According to this configuration, the game medium comes to flow down at a position close to the first transparent member, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(B1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The movable body moves from an origin position to a first position where the movable body does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member; and from the first position, the first transmission member and the second movement. The second operation of moving to the second position to enter between the transparent member and the second position can be performed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movement as shown in FIG. 51). The body 300 can perform a first motion ACT1 that moves to the first position P1 and a second motion ACT2 that moves to the second position P2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of (B1) above,
The movable body is capable of returning to the origin position without executing the second operation after executing the first operation,
The first operation and the second operation differ in the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like), an opening/closing door (for example, opening/closing frame 50 or the like) that can be opened/closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, and a door opening detection means for detecting opening of the opening/closing door. ,,
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
After the movable body executes the first operation, the second operation of the movable body is limited based on the opening detection of the open/close door by the door opening detection means.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmitting member from being damaged.

(B4) In the gaming machine of (B3) above,
The first opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened during operation of the movable body (for example, door opening notification at the time of moving the movable body in S63 of FIG. 45B) indicates that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened when there is no opening (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 45B).
According to this configuration, when the opening/closing door is notified, an appropriate treatment can be performed according to whether or not the movable body is operating.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any of (B1) to (B4) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
After the movable body executes the first motion, based on the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detecting means (for example, the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). A motion effect that causes the second motion of the movable body to be executed can be executed (based on operation detection).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The movable body is operable at a plurality of timings in variable display,
The execution rate at which only the first operation is executed and the execution rate at which the second operation is executed after the execution of the first operation are different between the first timing and the second timing in the plurality of timings (for example, 53A, only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development announcement shown in FIG. 53A and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot announcement shown in FIG. The execution ratio is different from the execution ratio in which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the first operation ACT1 is executed).
With this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to any of (B1) to (B6) above,
Display means capable of executing the display effect (for example, effect display device 5A, etc.) is arranged so as to be visible through the window,
The origin position is a position where the movable body does not overlap the display means or a position where only a part of the movable body overlaps the display means.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300 or the like),
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The gaming machine is an acceleration advance means for accelerating the movable body between the first transparent member and the second transparent member to advance (for example, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail of the base member 700). 701).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C2) In the gaming machine of (C1) above,
The acceleration advancing means is a guide member having a downward guide path portion in at least a part of a guide path portion that guides the movable body between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, the first guide member). The slide plate 301 of the movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C3) In the gaming machine of (C2) above,
The downward guide path portion is formed in a downward linear shape (for example, linear rail 701 of FIG. 34) or a downward arcuate path (for example, concave arcuate path RT1, convex arcuate path RT2 of FIG. 55). ing.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C4) In the gaming machine of (C3) above,
The guide path portion is formed so as to be able to swing the movable body (for example, a concave arc-shaped path RT3 in FIG. 56, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to any of (C1) to (C3) above,
The movable body is capable of advancing to an intermediate position of the guide route portion and an advanced position advanced from the intermediate position (for example, intermediate position PS1 and advanced position PS2 in FIG. 57).
The degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on whether the movable body advances to the midway position or when the movable body advances to the advance position (for example, the first movable body 300 moves to the midway position PS1). The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit) that is controlled to an advantageous state is different between the case of advancing and the case of the first movable body 300 advancing to the advance position PS2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C6) In any of the gaming machines of (C2) to (C5) above,
The window portion includes a wall portion (for example, wall portions WL and WR in FIG. 58) extending in a direction connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member,
The guide path portion guides the first movable body 300 to a second position P2 as shown in FIG. The guide holes WL1, WR1 etc. are downward linear or arc-shaped.
With this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(C7) In the gaming machine according to any of (C1) to (C6) above,
An acceleration support unit (for example, a spring member) that supports acceleration of the movable body is provided.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C8) In any of the gaming machines of (C1) to (C7) above,
The guide member is capable of advancing toward the hole or the notch (for example, a rail 701 (guide member) is provided between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 via the hole 270). To enter).
With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C8) above,
A gaming machine main body, an opening/closing door (for example, an opening/closing frame 50) that can be opened/closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, and a door opening detection means (for example, a door opening detection switch) that detects opening of the opening/closing door, Equipped with
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
Based on the opening detection of the opening/closing door by the door opening detection means, the entry of the movable body between the first transparent member and the second transparent member is restricted (for example, an opening/closing frame by a door opening detection switch). Based on the open detection of 50, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 is restricted).
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmitting member from being damaged.

(C10) In the gaming machine of (C9) above,
The first opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened during operation of the movable body (for example, door opening notification at the time of moving the movable body in S63 of FIG. 45B) indicates that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification when the opening/closing door is opened when there is no opening (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 45B).
According to this configuration, when the opening/closing door is notified, an appropriate treatment can be performed according to whether or not the movable body is operating.

(C11) In the gaming machine according to any of (C1) to (C10) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
Based on the detection of the movement of the player by the movement detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the movable body It is possible to execute an action effect that is entered between the first transparent member and the second transparent member.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a side surface portion that connects the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, a cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62). 62) from a predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B), light emitted from the effect LED 9 passes through the cylindrical body 252A and is emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space S. By doing so, the first movable body 300 is light-emitted and decorated, and the decorative effect for decorating the movable body can be executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D2) In the gaming machine of (D1) above,
The predetermined effect is an effect capable of emitting light from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D3) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like);
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
The second transmissive member has a light incident portion (for example, a light incident portion 260a shown in FIG. 63) through which light can enter,
The gaming machine main body has a light emitting component (for example, LED 9a) arranged at a facing portion (for example, facing portion 3a) facing the light incident portion of the second transmitting member,
The second transmissive member is a light guide part (for example, a light guide part 260b or the like) capable of guiding the light incident on the light incident part from the light emitting component to the side surface part through the inside of the second transmissive member. ), and light from the light guide section can be emitted from the side surface section toward the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, light from the light guide section 260b is emitted from the cylindrical body 252A). The light can be emitted toward the first movable body 300 from the surface on the side of the space portion S).
According to this configuration, the decoration effect can be realized without electrically connecting the opening/closing door and the gaming machine main body.

(D4) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like); and an opening/closing door that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
The opening/closing door includes a light emitting component (for example, an LED 9a) for causing the side surface to emit light,
The light emitting component is electrically connected to the connection cable on the gaming machine main body side,
Light from the light emitting component can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the optical path can be secured only on the opening/closing door side, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine main body can be improved.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above,
There are a plurality of types of execution patterns as the decoration effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the effect LED 9 emits light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. Is possible),
The degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the type of the execution pattern of the decoration effect (for example, the degree of expectation is blue (expected degree: small) <green (expected degree: medium) <red (expected degree: (Large) and so on).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The movable body is capable of performing a plurality of types of operations when it enters between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, rotation of the first movable body 300). , Expansion, swinging, deformation, etc.), the execution pattern of the decoration effect is different according to the plurality of types of motions (for example, a plurality of types of light emission according to rotation, expansion, swinging, and deformation of the first movable body 300). As an aspect).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D6) above,
In the game area, a game area side light emitting component different from the light emitting component (eg LED 9a shown in FIG. 63) (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, a normal winning ball device 6A or a normal variable winning a prize) A light emitting component (LED) of the ball device 6B, at least one light emitting component (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light, and the like are arranged.
When the decoration effect is executed, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the decoration effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like);
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
On the opening/closing door, an opening/closing door-side light emitting component different from the light emitting component (for example, a performance LED 9) is arranged,
When the decoration effect is executed, the light-emitting component on the opening/closing door is turned off or emitted at a lower brightness than when the decoration effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
The predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detection means (for example, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). is there. According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
The mode of the predetermined effect changes based on the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detection means (for example, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). It is possible.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
A specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion connecting the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, as in the modification 12 shown in FIG. 64(A), the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body). A specific effect can be executed on the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) that connects the body 260).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
The side surface portion includes image display means (for example, the image display means DP shown in FIG. 64A) that displays an image as the specific effect.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E3) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
A projection means (for example, a projector) for projecting an image,
By projecting the image from the projection unit onto the side surface portion, the specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion (for example, the image from the projector is projected onto the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion)). Thus, the specific effect can be executed on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E4) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
The side surface portion is a light guide display unit that guides and displays the image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light inside (for example, the light guide display unit of Modification 13 shown in FIG. 64B). Light plate GP, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E5) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
The side surface portion has a light guide member (for example, a light guide member 260d of Modification 14 shown in FIG. 65A) capable of guiding incident light,
The specific effect is an effect in which a light emitting portion provided in the light guide member emits light, or a corresponding area portion (for example, a drawing) in the side surface portion corresponding to the light emitting portion (for example, the light emitting portion 9b). 65, corresponding area portion 260e in FIG. 66, etc.) emits light.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E5) above,
As the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific emission patterns (for example, a specific emission pattern in which at least one of emission color, brightness, and blinking interval is different).
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) that is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E7) In the gaming machine of (E5) above,
As the specific effect, a plurality of types of light emission mode patterns in which the light emission mode on the side surface portion is different stepwise (for example, as shown in FIGS. 65B and 66B, a tubular body 252A (side surface portion). There are a plurality of types of light emission mode patterns in which the light emission mode in stepwise is different),
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) that is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
In the game area, the light emitting parts on the game area side (for example, the light emitting parts (LED) of the center decoration frame 52, the light emitting parts (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the surface of the game board 2) At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part to emit light is arranged,
When the specific effect is executed, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E9) In the gaming machine according to any of (E1) to (E8) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like);
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
On the opening/closing door, an opening/closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the performance LED 9 of the opening/closing frame 50 or the like) is arranged,
When the specific effect is executed, the opening/closing door side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E10) In the gaming machine according to any of (E1) to (E9) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
The specific effect can be executed based on the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). is there. According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E11) In the gaming machine of (E4) or (E5) above,
Incident suppressing means (for example, shown in FIG. 63) that suppresses the light from the image light guide display means or the light guide member from entering at least one of the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member. The light blocking member 260c and the reflection member).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E11) above,
The window portion includes a main body member to which the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be attached and detached.
With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the cost of replacing parts and maintain the window easily.

(F1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A first movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
A second movable body different from the first movable body (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP of Modification 17 shown in FIG. 68),
The window is provided on a first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the first movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The first movable body has a first position that does not enter between the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and a second position that enters between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. , The first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1, as shown in FIG. 51, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172. 2nd action ACT2 that operates in two positions P2, and so on),
The second movable body can be located at a third position between the first position and the second position of the first movable body, and when moving the first movable body to the second position, It is movable to a fourth position that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body to the second position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is located between the first position P1 and the second position P2 of the first movable body 300). Can be located at the third position P3, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it can be moved to the fourth position P4 that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. There is).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F2) In the gaming machine of (F1) above,
The fourth position is closer to the first transmitting member than the second position (for example, a position closer to the first transmitting body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68) or the first position. It is a position away from the moving path of the movable body (for example, a position away from the moving path of the first movable body 300 as in Modification 18 shown in FIG. 70).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F3) In the gaming machine of (F1) or (F2) above,
The second movable body is a transparent effect means (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP in FIGS. 68 and 70) that guides light by guiding light internally.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F4) In any of the gaming machines of (F1) to (F3) above,
The second movable body can be located at the third position when the first movable body is located at the first position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F5) In any of the gaming machines of (F1) to (F4) above,
Before moving the first movable body to the second position, the second movable body is moved to the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F5) above,
A determination unit that determines that the second movable body has moved to the fourth position (for example, a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor that detect the position of the movable light guide plate MGP),
The movement of the first movable body to the second position can be performed based on the determination made by the determination means.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body can move in the first position.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first movable body and the second movable body from being damaged, and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort in the movable body production.

(F8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is not moved to the second position.
With this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F9) In any of the gaming machines of (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body remains stopped.
With this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F10) In any of the gaming machines of (F1) to (F6) above,
The degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is different when the second movable body is located at the third position and when it is located at the fourth position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3). The expected degree of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot expectation degree, etc.) is different between when the vehicle is positioned and when the vehicle is positioned at the fourth position P4).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F10) above,
In the game area, the light emitting parts on the game area side (for example, the light emitting parts (LED) of the center decoration frame 52, the light emitting parts (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the surface of the game board 2) At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part to emit light is arranged,
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F11) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like);
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
On the opening/closing door, an opening/closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the performance LED 9 of the opening/closing frame 50 or the like) is arranged,
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the opening/closing door side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F12) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
The movement of the second movable body to the fourth position and the movement of the first movable body to the second position can be executed based on the detection of the movement of the player by the movement detecting means (for example, , The movable light guide plate MGP can be moved to the fourth position P4 and the first movable body 300 can be moved to the second position P2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
It is possible to execute a transparent member operation effect of operating at least the first transparent member of the first transparent member and the second transparent member to the player side (for example, as shown in FIG. 73(B), (Transparent member operation effect in which only the first transparent body 250 is operated on the player side, transparent member operation effect in which both the first transparent object 250 and the second transparent object 260 are operated on the player side, etc.),
Execution of the transparent member operation effect makes it possible to move the movable body between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, as shown in FIG. 72(B), (1) The movable body 300 can be moved between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G2) In the gaming machine of (G1) above,
The transparent member operation effect is an effect in which only the first transparent member is operated on the player side, or an effect in which both the first transparent member and the second transparent member are operated on the player side (for example, As shown in FIG. 73(B), a transparent member operation effect in which only the first transparent body 250 is moved to the player side, and both the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are moved to the player side. Transparent member motion production etc.)
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G3) In the gaming machine of (G1) above,
As the transparent member operation effect, only the first transparent member is operated on the player side, while the transparent member operation pattern and both the first transparent member and the second transparent member are operated on the player side. There is a transparent member operation pattern,
The one-transmissive member operation pattern and the both-transmissive member operation pattern have different expectation levels (for example, big hit expectation degrees) controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G4) In the gaming machine according to any of (G1) to (G3) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
The movable body can be moved between the first transparent member and the second transparent member based on the execution of the transparent member motion effect and the detection of the motion of the player by the motion detection means (for example, , The first movable body 300 can be moved between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G5) In any of the gaming machines of (G1) to (G4) above,
A first operation pattern in which the movable member moves between the first transparent member and the second transparent member when the transparent member motion effect is executed, and the transparent member operation effect is executed in which the movable member is A second motion pattern that does not move between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member can be executed (for example, the transmissive member operation effect is executed to cause the first movable body 300 to move to the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250). The second operation pattern in which the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 by executing the first motion pattern between the second transparent body 260 and the transparent member motion effect. Patterns are executable and so on).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G6) In the gaming machine of (G5) above,
The first operation pattern and the second operation pattern differ in the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G6) above,
In the game area, the light emitting parts on the game area side (for example, the light emitting parts (LED) of the center decoration frame 52, the light emitting parts (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the surface of the game board 2) At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part to emit light is arranged,
When the transparent member operation effect is executed, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower luminance than when the transparent member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G8) In the gaming machine according to any of (G1) to (G7) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like); and an opening/closing door (for example, an opening/closing frame 50 or the like) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The opening/closing door includes the window portion,
On the opening/closing door, an opening/closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the performance LED 9 of the opening/closing frame 50 or the like) is arranged,
When the transparent member operation effect is executed, the opening/closing door side light emitting component is turned off or emitted at a lower brightness than when the transparent member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G9) In the gaming machine according to any of (G1) to (G7) above,
The window portion, the window side light emitting component is arranged,
When the transparent member operation effect is performed, the window-side light-emitting component (for example, the window-side light-emitting component of the window portion 51 or the like) is turned on or light is emitted with higher brightness than when the transparent member operation effect is not performed. Let
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G9) above,
A detection unit (for example, a first transmission body position sensor) capable of detecting that the first transmission member has moved toward the player based on the execution of the transmission member operation effect,
Based on the detection by the detection means, the movable body can be moved between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250 has moved to the player side). If detected, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 is executed).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine or the like),
A frame body (for example, an opening/closing frame 50) provided with a window portion (for example, window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area,
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300 or the like),
The window is provided on the first transparent member (for example, the first transparent body 250) and on the game area side of the first transparent member, and a hole (for example, hole 270) or a cutout is formed. And a second transparent member (for example, a second transparent body 260), and the hole is provided in a space (for example, a space S) formed between the first transparent member and the second transparent member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the cutout portion,
The frame body is provided with operable frame side movable means (for example, frame side movable bodies SL and SR of Modification 21 shown in FIG. 74, a ball hitting operation handle HB shown in FIG. 75B, etc.),
A frame interlocking effect of operating the frame-side movable means in association with the movable body entering between the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be executed (for example, the first movable body 300). A frame interlocking effect of operating the frame-side movable bodies SL, SR and the ball hitting handle HB in association with the entry between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H2) In the gaming machine of (H1) above,
When the movable body enters between the first transparent member and the second transparent member, an interlocked pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and a non-interlocked pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means are executed. It is possible (for example, "non-interlocking pattern (only first movable body 300 operates)" and "interlocking pattern (first movable body 300 and frame-side movable bodies SL, SR interlock) shown in FIG. 76C). "Such).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H3) In the gaming machine of (H2) above,
The interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern have different expectations (for example, a jackpot expectation) controlled to an advantageous state.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
The timing when the movable body enters between the first transparent member and the second transparent member and the timing when the operation of the frame-side movable means starts are matched.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The timing of returning the movable body that has entered between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member and the timing of returning the state before the operation of the frame side movable means are matched.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The frame-side movable means is an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, a ball hitting handle HB, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B shown in FIG. 74), and the frame-side movable means operates as described above. That is, at least a part of the operation means operates (for example, at least a part of the hitting ball operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74 operates). According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H7) In the gaming machine of (H6) above,
The operation of the operation means is at least one operation of vibration, rocking, advancing, retracting and moving (for example, at least a part of the hitting ball operating handle HB shown in FIG. 74 vibrates, rocks, advancing, At least one of retreating and moving).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H8) In any of the gaming machines of (H1) to (H7) above,
An operation detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting an operation of the player is provided,
Based on the detection of the movement of the player by the movement detecting means, the movable body can enter between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, the first movable body 300 can be transmitted through the first transparent member). It is possible to enter between the body 250 and the second transmission body 260).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be made even if changes or additions are made without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted, while the number of balls used for the game is added while the number of balls that are circulated inside and lent out according to the player's lending request and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored by being stored. In these enclosed game machines, the points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls, and thus the given points and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which winning is possible.

In the case of a slot machine, the game area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which variable display of symbols by a variable display device such as a reel is executed. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device (for example, a reel, a liquid crystal display, etc.) having the above-described symbol.

In the embodiment, an example in which the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is used as the detection unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-contact type detection unit such as an infrared sensor or a contact type detection unit such as a touch panel may be used. It may be provided so as to detect the movement of the player.

The variable display of the identification information (special figure, effect design, ordinary figure, etc.) includes the blinking of the identification information. For example, in the special drawing, a pattern in which all the segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) is alternately repeated is also included in the variable display. The special symbol stopped and displayed in the variable display may be a symbol different from the special symbol displayed before the stop display (during change) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the ordinary symbol).

The gaming machine of the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that encloses a gaming medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize, a slot machine, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the below-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the following description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a first mechanism body (for example, the game board 2/variable display unit) and a second mechanism body (for example, the opening/closing frame 50 and the gaming machine) to which the first mechanism body can be attached/detached. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A, 1B/slot machine) provided with a gaming frame/main body portion composed of a frame 3
The first mechanism has control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the first mechanism and the second mechanism, and a plurality of types of second mechanism including a specific second mechanism ( For example, it can be attached to and detached from a special frame and a common frame,
The second mechanism body detects a plurality of detecting means for detecting the state of the second mechanism body (for example, the game frame can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame). Stick position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc. ) Is provided, the detection specifying information capable of specifying the detection state of each detection unit can be output to the control unit (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame indicates the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131). It is possible to generate identifiable serial data and output it to the production control board 12.),
The control means determines whether the first mechanism is the specified second mechanism mounted on the basis of the detection specification information output from the second mechanism, and determines the specified second. When it is determined to be a mechanism, the notification is performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the serial conversion IC 130 in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B. A portion that determines the type of game frame based on the serial data and performs any of the notifications A to C based on the determination result in S67, S73, and S86.),
further,
It is a gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can win and a second state in which a game medium cannot win or is difficult. The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022) is in a state different from the advantageous state, and the special winning state including changing the variable winning means to the first state (for example, a small hit) Special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 that executes steps S90358 to S90360) and a special state that is controlled to a special state more frequently than the normal state (for example, a game state) , KT state (first KT state, second KT state) can be controlled in a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S902208A, S902221A, S90222A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560). The variable winning means is provided so as not to win the game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being informed that it is controlled to a special state (for example, delaying the flow of the game ball. This is realized by providing a nail group 9055 as a delaying means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds), which does not trigger the advantageous state in the special state. The variable display includes a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, second variation patterns #25 and #27 of shortened variation) and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. Can be performed with the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation patterns #26 and #28 including the continuous effect), and in the special state, after the variable display is performed with the second variable display pattern, the special state is executed. The rate controlled by the first variable display pattern is lower than the rate controlled by the first variable display pattern to be in the special state (for example, in the case of a small hit, the second variation pattern having a relatively long variation time). The proportion determined to #28 is low (or not determined) (see FIG. 93).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem caused by being attached to the specific second mechanism body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being deteriorated and to enhance the effect of production. Furthermore, since the variable display pattern has a different proportion of control in the special state, the player can pay attention to the variable display pattern, which improves the interest. In other words, it is possible to achieve both a defect in the gaming machine relating to the mounting of the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body and an increase in interest by improving the player's winning of the variable winning means. It is possible to provide the player with a suitable game opportunity while suppressing the rate of inconvenience related to the game caused by the mismatch of the game machines.

In addition, when it is determined that the second mechanism body to which the first mechanism body is mounted is the specific second mechanism body (dedicated frame) (the correspondence between the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body is not normal). In the case), even if the game is possible, a notification that the correspondence is not normal is given, and it is determined that it is a second mechanism body (common frame) other than the specific second mechanism body (first case). Control so that the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state is higher than that in the case where the correspondence between the first mechanism and the second mechanism is normal) You may. By doing so, the interest of the game will be lower than in the case where the correspondence between the first mechanism and the second mechanism is normal, so the first mechanism will be pointed out by the player. It can be expected that the correspondence between the second mechanical body and the second mechanical body is returned to the normal correspondence.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect caused by being attached to the specific second mechanism body, prevent the entertainment from being deteriorated, and enhance the effect of production. , A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and can be changed to a first state in which a game medium can win and a second state in which a game medium cannot win or is difficult The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022) is in a state different from the advantageous state, and includes a special state (for example, a small state in which the variable winning means changes to the first state). Special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 that executes steps S90358 to S90360) and a special state that is controlled to a special state more frequently than the normal state ( For example, a part that executes special state control means (for example, steps S902208A, S902221A, S90222A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B) in the game control microcomputer 90560 that can be controlled to the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). ) Is provided, the variable winning means is provided so that the game medium ejected toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, delaying the flow of the game ball. This is realized by providing a nail group 9055 as a delaying means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hitting game to 0.8 seconds), and an opportunity to be controlled to an advantageous state in the special state. The variable display that does not become the variable display period is the first variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern #25, #27 of the shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period, and the second variable display period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is possible to execute with the second variable display pattern which is the period (for example, the second variation pattern #26, #28 including the continuous effect), and in a special state, after the variable display is performed with the second variable display pattern, the special display is performed. The ratio controlled to the state is lower than the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the first variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the second variation has a relatively long variation time). The rate of being determined by pattern #28 is low (or not determined. See FIG. 93). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. 79 is a front view of a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) 901 as seen from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of the gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. Good.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 which is provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (games to be described later). (Excluding the board 906).

As shown in FIG. 79, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition that is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying a decorative design (first decorative design) for performance and deriving and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition which is a second execution condition. A display area for variably displaying and deriving a display result of a plurality of types of decorative patterns for production (second decorative patterns) that can be identified based on (for example, that a hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014) (Hereinafter, referred to as the second variable display unit 909b.), and a display area (hereinafter, background symbol display unit) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the display content than the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. 909c)). In addition, it is easy to visually recognize the display content, for example, because the display area is large, or the display content on the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b is always a single color. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background design effecting unit 909c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background design) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that a game ball has entered a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening. Derivatively displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effecting unit 909c is provided for two variable display units (the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b), and two variable symbols are provided in the background symbol effecting unit 909c. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) variably displayed on the display unit is executed, the state of the decorative pattern (for example, whether the jackpot pattern is displayed or not) ) Is difficult to grasp. In addition, in this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the variable display of the symbol for the effect on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

Above the effect display device 909, a first special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display device 908b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b are each realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9, for example. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol, 0 to 99 and the like, more various numbers It may be configured to variably display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Moreover, a part may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the first special symbol. Character different from the above character may be included.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display device 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a composed of four displays is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one. In addition, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, a second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of reservation storages. It is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b increases the number of display units to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (for effect) symbol during a variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 908a. Further, the second variable display portion 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 908b. The 1st variable display part 909a and the 2nd variable display part 909b which perform variable display of a decorative design are controlled by the microcomputer for effect control mounted in the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 909a may be referred to as a first decorative pattern, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 909b may be referred to as a second decorative pattern. Further, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be collectively referred to as a decorative pattern. The type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both are numbers 0 to 9) or may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the first decorative design type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second decorative design type is numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and is the first decorative design. Character different from the above character may be included.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entering into the second starting winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total reserved storage number) which is the sum of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c which is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b are respectively four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold storage display 9018c. Although configured, a display device of another mode may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 9018a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b is composed of one display device, and if the display color is different or the display density is different depending on the number of reserved memories. To be

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total number of display pending storages, that is, the total number of display pending storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of display areas to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of display areas to be turned on is reduced by one. Alternatively, of the eight display areas in the symbol reserve storage display section 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of regions displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4 and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 9013, the winning is an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 9013, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4 and the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 9014, the winning is an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When a game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 9014 when the second number of stored memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second effective starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the summed reserved storage number is set to 8. However, those values are merely examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changeable according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

Above the gate 9032, a group of nails 55 forming a flow path of the right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow down of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders to the left and right. While flowing down. Since the group of nails 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024 described later.

An operation gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the operation gate 9017 is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a.

Below the operation gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 908b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in the open state, so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning hole 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 79, a special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to it on the right side. As will be described later in detail, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are plate-shaped bottom surfaces formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member forward and backward, a special winning opening 9024 and a second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom surface member can be won and the game ball can be won. It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 908b, and the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening 9024 which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015, when the normal symbol display device 9010 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed so as to have the same structure. However, as shown in FIG. 79, the variable winning ball device 9015 is variable. Compared with, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger. Further, as shown in FIG. 79, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is dropped in the game area 907 without winning. The game ball first drops onto the variable winning ball device 9015, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning port 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning hole 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole 9014 is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Furthermore, if the special winning opening 9024 is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and drops to the outlet 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 has a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

Inside the special winning opening 9024, a switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 83) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening 9024 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 9013a or the second starting winning opening 9013b. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning port 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed through (entering) the special winning port 9024 to obtain the prize ball. Will be disadvantageous to the person.

In addition, inside the second starting winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operation gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning hole 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, during a big hit game or in a KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 to perform a shooting operation (so-called right). Striking operation). Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the big hit game is in progress or in the KT state, for example, "right hit" or the like is displayed on the effect display device 909 or the right direction. It is desirable to display by an arrow indicating “” to notify that the right-handing operation period is in progress.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 that variably displays the normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 9010 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display device 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example. Further, the normal symbol display device 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, and for example, a display device capable of lighting up and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting up and displaying "○" and "x"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1.

On the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, there are provided decorative lamps 9025 which are displayed blinking during the game, and at the bottom there is an outlet 9026 for taking in a hit ball which has not been won. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect or a sound as a predetermined sound output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 907. A top frame lamp 9028a, a left frame lamp 9028b, and a right frame lamp 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer peripheral upper part, the outer peripheral left part, and the outer peripheral right part of the game area 907. In addition, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 9028b, and an out-of-ball lamp 9052 that lights when the supply ball runs out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball operation handle 905, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball to a game area 907 (not shown). ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 907 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then comes down the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game end or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display portion 908a, and the first variable symbol is changed on the first variable display portion 909a. The display will start. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the number of total reserved memories (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game end or the previous variable display). Ends, that the second start condition is established), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display portion 908b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second variable display portion 909b. The variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. If it is not in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total reserved storage number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by 1. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c is increased by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 909a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a fixed time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening. One round in the jackpot gaming state is until a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls is won in the special winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls wins the special winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The continuation right can be generated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). Alternatively, a V winning area may be provided in the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the big hit game state varies depending on the type of big hit. In this embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and 16R certainty variation big hit. State is given, 6R normal big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, 6 round big hit game state is given, 16R probability variation big hit occurs, 16 round big hit game state is given.

When it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with special variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7") Is a probability change state with a higher probability of being a big hit next (there is a low probability/non-KT state and a low probability/the first KT state described later) (a high probability that a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) This is a state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probability variation symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 908a becomes a jackpot symbol becomes high, The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 908b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting prize, it is determined that the big hit has a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 909b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit game state.

When it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of the variation stop of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with special variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a probability change state with a higher probability of being a big hit next (there is a low probability/non-KT state and a low probability/the first KT state described later) (a high probability that a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) The state is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probability variation symbol and shifts to a probability variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a big hit symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Moreover, when the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a small hit symbol, it shifts to a small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain time period during which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024 has elapsed. As a result, even in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is provided so that the player can obtain a payout, although it is less than the large hitting game state. In this embodiment, the small-hit gaming state is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the large-hit gaming state (in this example, the number of coins that can be obtained is small), but is advantageous for the player. The game state does not transition to another game state before and after the game state.

In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are big hit symbols (specific display result: for example, , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, a game state in this embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in this embodiment includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Also, as will be described later, the second KT state of the KT state is such that the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015 is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 9022. Easy to win.

The probability variation state is a gaming state that is more likely to be a big hit than the low-probability state. Specifically, since the number of big hit determination values in the big hit determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of big hit determination values in the big hit determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation occurrence in the big hit determination table is larger than that in the low probability state. The game state is easy to play.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state, but at the time of the change of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, when the second special symbol changes, it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit (however, except for the case of forced disengagement which will be described later), so the KT state is a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the game state in this embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the player aims at the left side of the game area 907 and performs a game ball firing operation (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, the start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to a low-probability/first KT state, a high-probability/first KT state, or a high-probability/second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the low probability/first KT state is entered, and thereafter, when the variable display of 100 times is completed without the big hit occurrence, the first KT state is ended and a normal state is entered. Further, for example, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the high probability/first KT state is maintained, and then the high probability/first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the high probability/second KT state is maintained, and then the high probability/second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, the first KT state is terminated when the variable display is uniformly repeated 100 times, but this embodiment is limited. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of big hits that trigger the low probability/first KT state, and the number of variable displays in which the first KT state continues after the big hit game is different depending on the big hit type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

If the player has moved to the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in this embodiment, the player moves the game area 907 to the right. Aim and shoot the game ball (right hit). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to a low probability/first KT state, a high probability/first KT state, or a high probability/second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the low probability/first KT state is entered, and thereafter, when the variable display is completed 100 times without a big hit, the first KT state is ended and a normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R certainty variation big hit or a 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state, and then the high probability/first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the high probability/second KT state is maintained, and then the high probability/second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

However, as will be described later, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R certainty variation jackpot is achieved despite the non-KT state before the jackpot start, the high probability state is entered. However, control is performed such that the state shifts to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). That is, although it is in the normal state, it is hit to the right and the 16R probability variable big hit occurs due to the variation display of the second special symbol, and in such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the player can get the prize ball, there is a possibility that some players will positively play the game right-handed in the normal state, which impairs the original playability. From this, even if the right hit in the normal state and the 16R certainty variation big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, by penalizing it by only shifting to the first KT state, the normal state It is possible to suppress an aggressive right-handed game.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 909a are synchronized. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 909b are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

Further, when the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, a decorative pattern (for example, "7") that recalls the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a special decorative pattern (for example, "7") that recalls the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

In the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background patterns are stopped and displayed during variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. It is displayed (the background pattern is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol (for example, left, which reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol). It becomes three background patterns with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such a background design is also called a big hit design.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c.

Further, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and at the same time, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The effect corresponding to any one of the variable display is executed.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is ended. When is displayed as a derivation display, the variable display of the background design is ended, and the stop design of the background design is derivatized and displayed. Moreover, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol for which the variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for the background symbols which are not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol of the three background symbols constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol. ) Is performed, and all or some of the background symbols are in a state of being variably displayed in synchronization while constituting all or part of the big hit symbols.

For example, in the state where the decorative design (for example, “7”) which is a part of the big hit design is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background design display unit 909c. The display area inside is still variably displayed, and the state where all or part of the symbols in the display area are variably displayed in synchronization while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background The left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display portion 909c are variably displayed, and the variable display is performed in a state where the same symbols are always arranged) is the reach display mode or reach.

In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual is performed with a lamp or a sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display portion 909c are referred to as reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (effect display imitating a person or the like, different from the background pattern) is displayed, or the background of the background pattern display unit 909c (background color or pattern different from the pattern and character). Etc.) may be changed in display form (for example, color, etc.).

Next, FIG. 80 to FIG. 82 are views showing the special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. Although the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 has been described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 with respect to this embodiment, the size of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022. The structure of the ball device 9015 is similar to the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a base plate portion 90101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. A special winning opening 9024 (the second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) opening forward is formed in a substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, and the special winning portion of the base plate portion 90101 is formed. A slit-shaped accommodation hole 90102 that is long in the left-right direction for accommodating the bottom surface member 9023 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward is formed at a position above the mouth 9024. Has been done. In addition, in this embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is formed slightly left of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right of this.

The bottom surface member 9023 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right side is made to flow down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 9023. Is formed. The bottom surface member 9023 can be moved forward and backward between the forward movement state shown in FIG. 81 and the backward movement state shown in FIG. 82, and the bottom surface member 9023 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) for moving back and forth is arranged.

Returning to FIG. 80 to FIG. 82, a flow path forming base portion 90112 protruding forward is formed on the front surface side of the base plate portion 90101, and forward movement is performed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base portion 90112. An upstream region 9023U which is an upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023 in the state of being connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023, and an upstream flow passage portion 90113 which forms a flow passage of the game ball together with the bottom member 9023, The downstream region 9023L, which is the lower end (left end) of the bottom face member 9023, is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom face member 9023, and the downstream side flow passage part 90114 that forms the flow passage of the game sphere together with the bottom face member 9023 is formed. There is.

In addition, in the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112, the upper end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 are recessed downward from the bottom member 9023 side end, and the special winning opening 9024 is left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 for guiding the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024 is formed so as to be surrounded from below.

The upstream side flow passage portion 90113 and the downstream side flow passage portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward leftward toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space in the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 for guiding the game ball backward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (the back side of the game area 907) is provided. ing.

Furthermore, a coating portion 90117 that integrally covers the upstream flow passage portion 90113, the downstream flow passage portion 90114, and the guide flow passage portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow passage formation base portion 90112. Has been done. This covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow passage portion 90113, the downstream side flow passage portion 90114, and the guide flow passage portion 90115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down through these flow passage portions bounce toward the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In addition, in this embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is formed integrally with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, the flow of game spheres that are continuous in the left-right direction and that is composed of the upstream side flow passage portion 90113, the bottom surface member 9023, and the downstream side flow passage portion 90114. The path F is formed. Here, in this embodiment, the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are provided with a plurality of restriction pieces 90118 for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down the flow path F.

In this embodiment, the restricting piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape that protrudes forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protrudes rearward from the covering portion 90117. By interfering with, by changing the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, the time required for the flow is limited when the restriction piece 90118 is not present. Delay more than. These restriction pieces 90118 are formed so as to be lined up at a predetermined interval in the flow-down direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. In addition, the restriction piece 90118 is set to have a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width of the bottom surface member 9023 in the front-rear direction, and a width dimension that allows the game ball to pass between adjacent pieces. There is. More specifically, in this embodiment, one restricting piece 90118 is formed in a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream passage portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream passage portion of the covering portion 90117 is formed. One restricting piece 90118 is formed in a portion that covers 90114 from the front. Further, in a portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulating pieces 90118 that are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. Note that the number of such restriction pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in this embodiment, most of the restriction piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front side (player side).

With the arrangement of the restriction pieces 90118 as described above, referring to FIG. 81, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of this embodiment tries to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P will flow down along the flow path F in a meandering manner. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P has the special winning port 9024 (or the second starting winning port 9014). Basically, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) is passed without winning. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 82, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom member 9023 has moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 to win the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. In addition, in FIG. 83, a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like are also shown. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. The I/O port unit 9057 may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 9031.

Moreover, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. An input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020, a solenoid 90106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9022, and a solenoid 90206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 are game-controlled. The output circuit 59 which is driven according to a command from the microcomputer 90560 for use is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game controlling microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on and the occurrence of a big hit game state An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. Note that the main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not illustrated) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 sends effect control commands from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The display control is performed for the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and display the decorative symbols variably, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbols, and the symbol reservation storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 84, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be installed. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 9080 has an effect control microcomputer 90200 including an effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be external. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 in the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 allows the signal input from the relay board 9077 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction restricting means that allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. 84. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I/O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. 83. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the side of the relay substrate 9077).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input/output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input/output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 through the input/output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each of the lamps provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. Further, it is supplied to the decoration lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, a special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input/output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data that indicates the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the decorative pattern) in time series.

It should be noted that the signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are bidirectionally communicated between the effect control CPU 90201 and the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, a character, a figure or a symbol (including a decorative pattern and a background pattern). It is for storing. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP 90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, a VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the production control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 is mounted, and a second circuit on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) is installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as the production control board. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the sound output board 9070 or the lamp shown in FIG. 84). It may be configured to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 in the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may be simply passed on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means may receive the command. The control related to the voice control and the lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 for controlling the effect display device 909 as it is or after being changed to, for example, a simplified command. May be. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command relating to an effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is sent from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after being processed (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, selecting only the necessary command), and then sent. It may be configured to be performed.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether the content of the program is valid or not. After executing the security check process for confirming whether or not the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are initialized (step S904)). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized by the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is the interrupt address. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms only once the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S906). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not in the ON state, check whether the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Yes (step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

Upon confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match) because the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved. If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is executed when the power supply is not restored.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state recovery process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processes of steps S9091 and S9092, the stored contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls. For example, a part in which data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the pointer to the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 (step S9093), and according to the contents, a control command (power control command) indicating that the power supply is restored to the effect control board 9080. Control is performed so that a restoration command as an initialization command at the time of restoration of supply is transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the state restoration process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). It should be noted that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, the special symbol buffer, the total prize ball number storage buffer, the special symbol process flag, the prize ball flag, the out-of-ball flag, the payout stop flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set to the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 to the pointer (step S9013), and transmits the initialization command for initializing the sub-board to the sub-board according to the contents. Processing is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command or the like indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S9017) and the initial value random number updating process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number updating process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter (big hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the processing to perform, or the processing of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control processing), the count value of the big hit determination random number generation counter or the like makes one round (the big hit determination random number generation counter, etc. When the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum values that can be taken is increased), an initial value is set to the counter.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power interruption detection process is executed to detect whether a power interruption signal is output (whether it is in an ON state) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Then, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input through the input driver circuit 9058. Then, the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 is a first special symbol display device 908a, a second special symbol display device 908b, a first special symbol reservation storage display device 9018a and a second special symbol reservation storage display device 9018b display control processing to perform display control. It is executed (step S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b, the control for outputting a drive signal to each display device is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determines whether to generate a big hit or small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2': The type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and 16R certainty variation big hit (for big hit type determination).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for fluctuation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6': Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the random 1'initial value)
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 86, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol hit determination. The counter for generating a random number is counted up (1 is added). That is, those are judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. It should be noted that random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) described above are also used in order to enhance the game effect. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided. It may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process processing, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Perform the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol process processing (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process processing, according to the game state, the normal symbol display 9010 or the variable winning ball device 9015 is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol process flag in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a pending storage process (step S9027a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 is detected according to the winning detection based on that any one of the first starting port switch 9013a, the second starting port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a is turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signal from the first starting port switch 9013a or the second starting port switch 9014a, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for designating one prize ball for payout control. Microphone Output to computer. Further, for example, when the detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a is input, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command designating 15 prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball wins the special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect which will be described later are not immediately executed but are delayed. However, with respect to the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball process of step S9030, when the detection signal from the second count switch 9025a is input, the payout control for immediately designating 15 prize balls. A command is output, and the payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 to immediately pay out 15 prize balls.

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 outputs the content regarding the ON/OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. Along with, the special symbol display which sets the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data according to the value of the second special symbol process flag Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, and thus the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data ( Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes a variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by the two display devices of the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b, but the CPU 9056 is The two displays are controlled so that no big hits occur at the same time.

FIG. 88(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random 1'is set. The big hit judgment table includes a non-probable-variable-time big hit judgment table used in a low-probability state (low probability/non-KT state, low probability/first KT state) and a definite change state (high-probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability state). Probability/second KT state)), which is a probability variation big hit judgment table. The numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 88(A) are set in the non-probability-variable jackpot determination table, and the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 88(A) are set in the probability-variable jackpot determination table. Numerical value is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 88(A) is a jackpot determination value.

FIG. 88(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hitting determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which the small hitting determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value described in FIG. 88(B) is set in the small hit determination table. Also, the numerical value described in FIG. 88(B) is the small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the small hit may already be described. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed more frequently. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of control to the small hitting game state is higher than that of the large hitting game state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit judging random number (random 1'). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. 88(A). When any one of the jackpot determination values shown is matched, it is determined to be a jackpot for the special symbol. Also, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 88(B), it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 88(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 88(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the probability (ratio) of small hits is set to 122/487, which is set to about 1/4. There is. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. In addition, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, whether the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b to be a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 88(B) is performed, and about 1/4 It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be out of force).

FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 2'), the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", " It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of "2R probability variation big hit", "6R normal variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", or "16R probability variation big hit".

As shown in FIG. 89(A), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined to be "16R probability variation big hit" with a probability of 20% and "45% with a probability of 45%". 6R probability variable big hit" is determined, and there is a 35% probability that "6R normal big hit" is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(B), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as “16R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 30%, and a probability of 30%. "6R probability variation big hit" is decided, 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation big hit", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a 16-round big hit game state and shifts to the high-probability/second KT state after the big hit game state ends (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability change state). At the same time, the state shifts to the second KT state (see steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S90210B, which will be described later)). The probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

However, in this embodiment, in the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not the second KT state even if it becomes "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

The "6R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to the high probability/first KT state after the big hit game state is finished (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probability change state). At the same time, the state shifts to the first KT state (see steps S902210A, S902221A, S902212B, S902213B, which will be described later). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to only the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state (see step S902212A described later). After the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished (see steps S902213A, S902010 to S902013). The first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (see step S902015).

The "2R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to the high probability/first KT state after the big hit game state is finished (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probability change state). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S902212B and S902213B described later)). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to only the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state (see step S902214B described later). After the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display ends for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902215B, S902010 to S902013). The first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (see step S902015).

The types of jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When performing variable display of the second special symbol, in addition to 16R certainty variation big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, and 2R normal big hit, 3R certainty variation big hit to 7R certainty variation big hit may be configured to be determined, and various modes are considered. To be

90 to 92 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 90 to 92 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, seven types of first variation patterns #01 to #07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of #01 to #29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when referred to as the variation pattern #n (n=0 to 07 or 01 to 29), it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 90(A) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 90(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #05.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 90(B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 90(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #06 to #07.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 91(C) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 91(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined that the small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls into the special winning opening 9024. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91C, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hit is aimed at to win a prize ball even in the non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is 5 even if it is a big hit. By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent the action of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning port 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to take a long time to digest the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so that the variation time is shorter than that in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the variation pattern is selected by selecting the low probability/first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation shown in FIG. 91(D). It is determined. As shown in FIG. 91(D), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. To be done.

As shown in FIG. 91(D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation, the second change pattern #04 of the short change having a short change time of 5 seconds is determined. It In addition, when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is the small hit, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds as the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is lengthened to actually cause the special variable winning. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that some game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately transferred. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may enter the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 of before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to win the special winning port 9024, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, in the case of executing the variable display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R regular jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state is to be executed, FIG. 91(E) In the low probability/first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 99th fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 91(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 99th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #07 to #11. Is decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 91(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the first KT state is the second to 99th variation, the second variation pattern #07 of the short variation of the variation time is as short as 5 seconds. May be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 99th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #09 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined to have a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In this embodiment, the second to 99th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state are determined to be a deviation or a small hit, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern #08 or the second fluctuation pattern #10. In the case of the effect, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 909, the effect of the symbol twisting such as the reach effect or the sliding effect is executed.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 100th fluctuation display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the 100th variation shown in FIG. 91(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 91(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 to #14 is determined. To be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 91(F), when it is determined that the 100th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the effect display device 909. The second variation pattern #12 or the second variation pattern #13 accompanied by the end display is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 91(F), when it is determined that the 100th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the effect display device 909 displays a character such as "end chance time!!" After the display, the second variation pattern #14 with a predetermined revival display is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 having a variation time of 1 minute is determined. Is configured. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at which a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times is ensured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state is finished. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 92(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and the variation pattern is It is determined. As shown in FIG. 92(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #15 to #19. To be done.

Note that, as in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 92(G), when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state, the change time is 5 seconds. May be determined as the second variation pattern #15 of short shortening variation. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first change of the high probability/first KT state, the change pattern for the second starting winning opening opening preparation (second change pattern #17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 92(G), when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is a big hit, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern #19 including the effect is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(G), even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the deviation or the small hit, the second variation pattern #16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect. 18 may be determined.

In addition, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation, FIG. 92(H) The high probability/first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 92(H), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #20 to #24 It is determined.

Note that, as in the case of the second to 99th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the fluctuation time is also determined when the deviation is determined after the second fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state. May be determined as the second variation pattern #20 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds. Also, when the small hit is determined after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #22 of the short variation may be determined as a short variation time of 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 92(H), when it is determined that a big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the probability variation state (high-probability state) is indicated to indicate whether or not it ends. The second variation pattern #24 including the battle effect is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(H), even when it is determined that there is a deviation or a small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 or the second variation pattern including the battle effect. #23 may be determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 92(I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 92(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #25 to #29.

As shown in FIG. 92(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability/second KT state, the fluctuation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state) The second variation pattern #25 of the shortened variation may be determined to be shorter than the case where the display is performed by 1.5 seconds. Moreover, when it is determined that the small hit is in the high probability/second KT state, it is more than in the case where the variation display of the shortening fluctuation is executed in the first KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern #27 of the short fluctuation having the short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when it is determined that the high probability/second KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern including a continuous effect that suggests whether or not the high probability/second KT state continues. #26 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when it is determined that the high probability/second KT state is a small hit, the second variation including a continuous effect suggesting whether or not the high probability/second KT state continues. The pattern #28 may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when it is determined that the high probability/second KT state is a big hit, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern #29 including the effect is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuous effect and the battle effect is determined, the continuous effect and the battle effect are executed in the variable display of the background pattern on the effect display device 909. When it is a big hit (16R probability big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the effect of victory mode is executed in the battle effect, and when it becomes normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), battle effect The defeat-type effect is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the draw-type effect is executed in the battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and for example, even when the number of rounds during the big hit game is a 2R certainty variation big hit, the defeat form of the effect may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation patterns of the shortened variation of the second variation patterns #04, #07, #09, #15, #20, #22, #25, and #27, for example, it varies depending on the number of pending storages. The fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation may be determined by a ratio. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved storages increases, so that the reserved storages are quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, a case is configured in which a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds is executed in the first KT state, and a shorter shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds may be executed in the low probability state, and a shorter shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, a specific example of the determination rate of the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination rate of the variation patterns of the special symbols and the decorative symbols in the second special symbol variation pattern table [high probability/second KT time] shown in FIG. 92(I). In the second special symbol variation pattern table [high probability/second KT time] shown in FIG. 92(I), the determination value is assigned for each variation pattern, but in the example shown in FIG. 93, it is assigned. The ratio of the determined values (that is, the determination ratio for each variation pattern) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the high probability/second KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern #25 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 70% and the rate of 30%. Then, the second variation pattern #26 including the continuous effect is determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #27 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second variation pattern # including the continuous effect at a rate of 5%. 28 is decided. When it is determined that the high probability/big hit in the second KT state is achieved, the second variation pattern #29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is not a big hit, the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern #25, #27) and a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, second variation patterns #26, #28).

In the KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variable time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, but since the nail group 55 is provided, the game ball is launched. It takes at least 1.0 seconds to reach from the special variable winning ball device 9022. In other words, even if the game ball is shot after the small hit occurs (specifically, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of the small hit is notified), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured not to let you. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the attraction effect is rather lowered, rather than the attraction effect is increased. There is a risk of causing it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the variation display is performed by the variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation patterns #26, #28). The proportion of the small hits occurring after the execution of the “S” is set to be lower than the proportion of the small hits generated after the variable display is executed according to the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns #25, #27). Is assigned a judgment value. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won even if a small hit occurs, which rather reduces the interest, and to enhance the effect.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 93, when it is determined that the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #28 is determined to have a relatively long variation time at a rate of 5%. However, you may not be determined. That is, the second variation pattern #28 is not provided, or the determination value is not assigned to the second variation pattern #28, and in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time. The small hit may not occur even after the display is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the second variation patterns #26, # including the continuous effect are the variation patterns having a longer variation time than the variation patterns of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns #25, #27). 28 is provided, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, effects other than continuous effects (for example, when the display result is off, when it is a small hit, and when it is a big hit are commonly used. A variation pattern including a reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

For example, a variation pattern having a longer variation time than a shortened variation, a variation pattern that is out of alignment after a predetermined reach effect is executed, and a variation pattern that is a small hit after a predetermined reach effect is executed, A variation pattern that is a big hit after a predetermined reach effect is executed may be provided. Also in this case, the proportion of the small hits occurring after the variable display is performed by the variation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is performed depends on the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern #25, #27). It is desirable that the determination value is assigned so as to be lower than the ratio of the small hit after the variable display is executed. In addition, when the big hit does not occur after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the ratio of deviating from the small hit becomes higher.

Further, in the case of determining a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, it is possible to select any one of three or more fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, and to increase the ratio of selection from a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time. May be. For example, a variation pattern including a first reach effect (variation time of 10 seconds) and a variation pattern including a second reach effect (variation time of 20 Second) and a variation pattern including a third reach effect (variation time of 30 seconds) are provided, and when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, a variation pattern including a first reach effect (variation time of 10 seconds). The selection ratio may be made higher in the order of the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds). In addition, the variation patterns including the third reach effect (variation time of 30 seconds)> the variation patterns including the second reach effect (variation time of 20 seconds)> the variation patterns including the first reach effect (variation time of 10 seconds) are displayed in this order. If the result is not the big hit, the ratio of being out of the small hit may be higher. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won even if a small hit occurs, which rather reduces the interest, and to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, the small hit rate is low (or does not occur) after the variable display is executed by the variable pattern having the relatively long variable time. Even in the first KT state, the ratio of small hits may be low (or may not occur) after the variable display is executed by the change pattern having the relatively long change time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delaying means for delaying the flow down of the game balls, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hitting game is set to 0.8 seconds, so that the small Even if a game ball is launched after a hit has occurred (specifically, after a small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, or even if the nail group 55 is not provided, the special winning opening 9024 is set for a predetermined period until the game ball arrives (for example, It may be realized by arranging at a position that takes 1.0 second or more, which is longer than the opening period.

Further, when in the KT state, a right-handing notification that prompts the player to aim the right side of the game area 907 to launch a game ball (for example, a character display of "right-handed" on the effect display device 909 or When displaying the arrow display indicating the right direction or the like), when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation pattern #25, #27), The right-hand hitting notification may be executable in a different mode from when the variable display is being performed by the variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation patterns #26, #28). For example, in the KT state, when the variable display is executed by the variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation patterns #26, #28), the percentage of small hits is low, and the right hitting operation is performed. Since it is less likely to be a disadvantage to the player even if the player stops, the "right-hand hit" is performed more than when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation pattern #25, #27). The character display, the arrow display indicating the right direction, or the like may be reduced or made transparent to prevent the right-handedness from being positively urged. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute suitable right-handing notification according to the situation.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 94(1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 94(2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning ball device 9015 in the second KT state. The open pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 94(1). As shown in FIG. 94(1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the normal symbol is hit. When it is determined that the normal symbol display 9010 is hit and the symbol is derived and displayed, and when it is determined that it is out, the normal symbol display 9010 is derivatized and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 94(1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port 9014 when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 94(1), the special variable winning a prize ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. Becomes However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 94(1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 9022 is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas that of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015 is short. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 94(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is finished, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be performed in the variable time of the next ordinary symbol. It is after a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds which is a total of 0.2 seconds, the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as the interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 94(2). As shown in FIG. 94(2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the normal symbol is hit. When it is determined, the normal symbol display 9010 is hit and the symbol is derived and displayed, and when it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display 9010 is derivatized and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 94(2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port 9014 when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 94(2), the special variable winning a prize ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. Becomes

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.0 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened (ordinary symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second starting winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 94(2), the open time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, so that the downstream side compared to the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, in the big hit game state, a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round, but the winning frequency of the game balls is low, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is being played. It is possible to win 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the gaming balls to the special winning port or the special winning port 9024 with respect to the number of gaming balls shot in the gaming area 907.

In this embodiment, the process of performing variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is performed by executing (see step S9026C). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to make a universal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not it should be a general map. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing state (high probability state), whether it is the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state, or whether it is the jackpot gaming state. , It is determined by the same probability whether or not the hit is a universal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol settlement time are the same at 0.2 seconds, respectively, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state is shown. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be made different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. In addition, for example, the second start winning opening opening processing time after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 94(1). The ball device 9015 is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern (a short opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 94(2) ( You may comprise so that it may control by short open. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

Even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of 100 times the special symbol of the low probability/first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long opened when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability/first KT state is completed. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 9015, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened variation may be separately managed.

Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024 described later. In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 94, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol which is relatively long in the first KT state is performed in a variable manner, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 9015 is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032) The variable winning ball device 9015 is not opened by the time the gaming ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special winning port 9024 can be won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the game ball can be changed before it reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 after passing through the gate 9032. Since the opening of the winning ball device 9015 is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation of the ordinary symbol Although the time is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds, the strategy element may be eliminated by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the capture element may be eliminated by the position, shape, and opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening 9024 is set so that the period until the game ball shot after the small hit occurs reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special winning opening 9024 due to the small hit. The position, shape, and open pattern may be defined.

95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 95, commands 8000(H) to 8007(H), 8011(H) to 802C(H) are the first variable display section 909a or the second variable display section corresponding to the variable display of special symbols. 909b is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000(H) to 8007(H) and 8011(H) to 802C(H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b. At, control is performed so as to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the game control microcomputer 90560 receives the display result designation immediately before the first variation pattern command. The command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the first decorative pattern, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second decorative pattern. The display result designating command can be used for both the first decorative design and the second decorative design, but the display result designating command for the first decorative design and the display result designating command for the second decorative design may be different.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send the display result designation command, but responds to each of 15R probability variation big hit/6R probability variation big hit/6R normal big hit/2R probability variation big hit/2R normal big hit/small hit/off The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol fixing designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol fixing designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the big hit game start to the big hit game end. Among them, B000 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) that designates the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is a production control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is a production control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during big winning opening opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX (H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning prize winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning prize.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designating command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designating command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning award designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning award designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX(H) is an effect control command (a winning determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and the type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 98) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit, and a big hit type at the time of starting winning. To judge. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the type of big hit, whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command.

In this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the "out", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 1 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R probability variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R normal big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 4 designating command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R probability variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 5 designating command) in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R normal big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 6 designating command) in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 7 designating command) in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined which determination value range the value of the variation pattern determination random number falls within, and the determination result (the determination result of the variation pattern) is displayed. You may make it transmit the command shown. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the variation pattern.

The command D000(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command E000 (H) is a production control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is the low probability/non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is high probability/second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 installed on the main board 9031. Then, the display states of the first variable display section 909a and the second variable display section 909b and the display state of the background pattern display section 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 9070. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to a big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, the process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When performing the first special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 has the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 9013 provided in the game board 906 turned on. In other words, if there is a start winning in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passage processing is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are the following processes.

First special symbol normal process (step S90300): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer for number of storages (total number of storages for storage). The number of storages of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Moreover, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the fluctuation time timer which measures the fluctuation time of the special design is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

First special symbol variation process (step S90303): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 displays Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the decorative display in the effect display device 909 to stop when the design confirmation designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90304A. If the first big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, based on the special symbol display control processing (step S9036), the special symbol display control data for stopping the stop symbol of the special symbol. Is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022.

First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of a game ball to the operation gate 9017 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-processing (step S90305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 9020 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the first special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S90306. It should be noted that the first special winning opening opening preprocessing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first special winning opening opening preprocessing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

First big winning opening opening process (step S90306): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display in the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control for transmitting the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. To do. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end processing (step S90307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in step S90312. In the starting opening switch passage processing, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). Is 4) or not) (step S90212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the first starting opening switch passage processing is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S90213), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 99) (step S90215). .. In the process of step S90215, a big hit determination random number (random 1'), a big hit type determination random number (random 2'), and a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5') that are software random numbers are extracted and stored in the storage area. Is stored. Random pattern determination random numbers (random 5') are not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning), but are extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5′) in a first fluctuation pattern setting process described later. You may

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers or the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 99, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer have a big hit determination random number (random 1'), a big hit type determination random number (random 2'), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5'). ) Is stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning determination process (step S90216), and controls to transmit a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process, which will be described later, determines the big hit type, but apart from that, At the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning determination process is executed in advance to make a big hit or Check if it is a small hit and the type of big hit. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1′) with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 88(A) and determines whether or not they match. Check. If they do not match, if the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1') with the probability variation time big hit determination value shown in the right column of FIG. To see if they match. It is to be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability change state is present in step S90216 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual start of the variable display based on the starting prize. There is. Therefore, the game state is changing before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started (for example, when a sudden variation big hit or sudden variation big hit occurs before the variation start, the normal state is changed from the certain state. It has changed to.) Therefore, the game state at the time of winning the start prize and the game state at the time of starting the variation are not always the same. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S90216 to S90218, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 occurs and the winning determination processing is executed, the symbol designating command and the first effective A set of two commands of the start winning award designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300, the first special symbol indicator 908a is in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, and, This is a case where the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times) is not in progress.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variable display was ended (step S9051A). It should be noted that whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variable display was ended is determined by, for example, a timer for measuring the period during which the variable display is not executed is 30 seconds when the last variable display is ended. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the end of the variable display, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to send a customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. In the first random number buffer area (step S9053A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. Yes (step S9054A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) is set to the first reserved storage number=n− Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages are The order of extraction is also saved so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the low probability/non-KT state is set, and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued when the probability variation flag is off. If the 1KT flag is on, the low probability/first KT state is determined and the low probability/first KT background designation command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the high probability/first probability is set. High probability/first KT background designation command determined to be in 1 KT state, high probability/high accuracy/second KT determined to be in high probability/second KT state when probability variation flag is on and second KT flag is on Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big bonus of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processes of step S9064A and subsequent steps. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the second special symbol, the big hit determination value is stored forcibly regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the big hit determination random number (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. Alternatively, regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly disengaged.

In addition to the jackpot determination, in the gaming machine that performs the jackpot determination for determining whether or not to be a jackpot, if the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. Without performing the process of step 1, set a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or a completely different random number) The small hit determination may be forcibly deviated regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1') from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the big hit determination module ( Step S9065A). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R sure-change big hit, a 6R sure-change big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step S90160A), the big hit type is stored (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. To do. If the big hit is not made in step S9066A (that is, if the big hit is not made), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S9068A.

In addition, in step S9065A, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first selects one of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 90(A) and 90(B) according to the game state. Yes (step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 90 should be used (step S901700). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

Moreover, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 varies the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first special symbol process timer. Along with the start of time measurement (step S901702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the big hit type determination result. Control for transmitting any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the production control microcomputer 90200 is performed.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process process. In the process of changing the first special symbol, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S901121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S901112A), the symbol is fixed in the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to transmit the designated command is performed (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, the CPU 9056 shifts to step S901123A and performs control for transmitting a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

By performing the process of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is forced. The special special symbols and the second special symbols are stopped at the same time so that a big hit does not occur. In this case, in the effect control microcomputer 90200 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcedly disengaged, the first variable display section 909a displays the first symbol on the basis of receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. While stopping the stop display of the 1st decorative pattern, based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S90302, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the deviating pattern as the variable display result of the 1st decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 97 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 106, for each timer interrupt, the first starting port switch passage process (see step S90312). Since the second starting opening switch passage process (see step S90322) is executed, even when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, if a new start winning occurs It is configured to store new pending storage.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b (N in step S901125A), the process is terminated.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the KT number counter indicating the number of remaining times of the low probability/first KT state is "0" (step S902010), and is "0". If there is, that is, if it is not the low probability/first KT state, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT number counter is not “0”, that is, when the low probability/first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts “1” from the value of the KT number counter (step S902011) and determines whether the value is “0”. It is determined (step S902012). When the value of the KT number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT number counter becomes “0”, that is, when the 100th variation of the low probability/first KT state ends, the CPU 9056 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state ( The process moves to step S902013) and step S902014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low-probability/non-KT state) when 100 variations have ended in the low-probability/first KT state.

In step S902014, CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S902014). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT number counter if set (step S902015).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the special winning opening pre-opening timer (step S902017), sets the round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step S902019), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S902020).

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a has not been input, the processing is ended as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening opening preprocessing. The corresponding value is set (step S902503).

In this embodiment, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the operation gate 9017. The game ball has passed, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a first big hit ending process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S902204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S90221A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step S902202A). Then, the big hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S902203A), and the process is ended.

In step S902204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating a probability variation state and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating a second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot completed this time is 6R probability variation big hit (step S902209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S90210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to set the first KT state. (Step S902211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S90222A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” to the KT number counter indicating the low probability/remaining number of times of the first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, the process for controlling the second special symbol display device 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When performing the second special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 has the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 provided in the game board 906 turned on. In other words, that is, if a starting winning in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 occurs (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (step S90322). It should be noted that, if the "first" of the first starting port switch passage process shown in FIG. 98 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passage process will be described. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are the following processes.

Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer for number of storages (total number of storages for storage). The number of storages of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Moreover, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. When the big hit is not made, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit. When it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90351. The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over. Further, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game is over.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the fluctuation time timer which measures the fluctuation time of the special design is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90352.

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90353.

Second special symbol variation process (step S90353): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 displays Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the decorative display in the effect display device 909 to stop when the design confirmation designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second big hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 in this example) corresponding to step S90354A. When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90358. When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is off (including the case of forced off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

Second special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S90355): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second big winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 9020 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the second special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S90356. The second special winning opening opening preprocessing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second special winning opening opening preprocessing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening process (step S90356): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display in the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control for transmitting the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90355. To do. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S90357.

Second big hit ending process (step S90357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

Second small hit opening preprocessing (step S90358): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) is initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to set the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open control. Further, the execution time of the second small hit open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-process is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hitting open process (step S90359): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process of confirming whether or not the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 94). Further, when the game ball is won in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, control for transmitting a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for informing the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90350.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S90350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350, the second special symbol indicator 908b is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, and, This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened) is being played.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variable display was ended (step S9051B). It should be noted that whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variable display was ended is determined by, for example, a timer for measuring the period during which the variable display is not executed is 30 seconds when the last variable display is ended. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the variable display, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to send a customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. In the second random number buffer area (step S9053B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the content of each storage area is shifted. Yes (step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is converted into the second reserved storage number=n− Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designating command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S9063B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processes of step S9064B and subsequent steps. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit judgment value is forcibly disregarded regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the big hit determination random number (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. Alternatively, regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly disengaged.

In addition to the jackpot determination, in the gaming machine that performs the jackpot determination for determining whether to make a jackpot or not, if the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. Without performing the above process, set a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or a completely different random number). The small hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1') from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B) and executes the big hit determination module ( Step S9065B). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, a 6R certainty variation jackpot, a 2R certainty variation jackpot, or a 2R regular jackpot (step S90160B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S90161B). The process moves to step S9068B.

If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hitting determination module is a program for determining that the small hitting random number (may be a small hitting random number) matches with a predetermined small hitting determination value and determines a small hit. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9068B.

Then, in step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step S9068B.

In addition, in step S9065B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 101, the second variation pattern process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, and whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the determination result of the type, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to send.

The second special symbol variation process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S90303) shown in FIG. 102. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 102, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 103 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 103, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is almost explained. However, in the second special symbol stop process, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step S90358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 104, the second gate passage waiting process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a second big hit ending process (step S90357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S902204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S902201B), and the control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step S902202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S902203B), and the process is ended.

In step S902204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If not, the process ends.

If the big hit end display time has passed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the 16R probability variation big hit (step S902206B). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit this time (step S902208B). Whether or not it was controlled in the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit, for example, in the second special symbol stop processing before starting the big hit game, it is the first KT state before the big hit starts. The first KT storage flag indicating that the second KT storage flag is set and the second KT storage flag indicating that the second KT state is set, and in step S902208B, it is determined whether the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set. Check it. If it is neither the first KT state nor the second KT state before the big hit starts, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S902209B). If the state is the first KT state or the second KT state before the big hit starts, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S90210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

By executing the processing of steps S902208B to S90222B, in this embodiment, when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is obtained based on the variable display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the jackpot start. Only the second KT state is entered, and if the non-KT state was entered before the big hit was started, the first KT state is entered. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state) is configured to perform a left-handed operation, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is configured assuming that. However, if it is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, even if it is in the non-KT state, dare to do the right strike operation It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original game play and unnecessarily enhance the gambling performance. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of a 16R certainty variation jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the second KT state only if the KT state was before the jackpot start, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is prompted to perform a left-handed operation.

If it is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit completed this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step S902211B). Whether or not it is the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state ( Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

If neither the 6R probability big hit or the 2R probability big hit (that is, the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” in the KT number counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90201 starts execution of main processing. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control is performed (step S90701). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 proceeds to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process processing (step S90705A). In the first decorative pattern process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display section 909a is executed. .. Further, the second decorative pattern process processing is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative pattern process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display section 909b is executed. .. Further, the background pattern process process for controlling the display state of the background pattern display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). Also, the prize ball number display processing for controlling the display of the prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game and the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). Further, the hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). In addition, a random number updating process of updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a preliminary announcement random number is executed (step S90709). After that, the process moves to step S90702.

110 to 112 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 4 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S90618A).

If the received effect control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 causes the first big hit start designation command reception flag or the second big hit start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first big hit start designation command reception flag and the second big hit start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received production control command is the big hit end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is the small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received production control command is the low-accuracy/non-KT background designation (step S90630), the production control CPU 90201 sets the background screen displayed on the production display device 909 to a background screen corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, , And a blue display color background screen) (step S90631). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state if set (step S90632). In addition, the production control CPU 90201 resets the prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game and the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S90633), and produces an effect display. If the prize sphere count display is displayed on the device 909, control for erasing the prize sphere count display is performed (step S90634).

If the received effect control command is the low-accuracy/first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 to the background screen corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, , And the background screen of the green display color) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state if set (step S90638). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the award ball count display according to the first KT pattern (step S90639). For example, the number of prize balls is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the display of the number of prize balls by any pattern is not yet displayed, the control for newly starting the display of the number of prize balls by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the number of prize balls is already displayed by the big hit pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is switched to the display of the number of prize balls by the first KT pattern.

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designation (step S90640), the production control CPU 90201 sets the background screen displayed on the production display device 909 to the background screen corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, , And a yellow display color background screen) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second KT state flag if set (step S90643). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the number of prize balls according to the first KT pattern (step S90644). For example, the number of prize balls is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the display of the number of prize balls by any pattern is not yet displayed, the control for newly starting the display of the number of prize balls by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the number of prize balls is already displayed by the big hit pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is switched to the display of the number of prize balls by the first KT pattern.

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designation (step S90645), the production control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the production display device 909 at a high probability/background screen corresponding to the second KT state (for example, , And a red display color background screen) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag if set (step S90648). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the number of prize balls according to the second KT pattern (step S90649). For example, the number of prize balls is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the award ball number display by any of the patterns is not yet displayed, the control for newly starting the award ball number display by the second KT pattern is performed. If the number of prize balls is already displayed by the big hit pattern or the first KT pattern, control is performed to switch the display to the number of prize balls display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S90644, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol variation stop processing described later are executed, so that a big hit game and a KT state (first KT state, second KT state) State), the number of prize balls is displayed. However, when the process of steps S90633 and S90634 is executed and the KT state is terminated and the low probability/non-KT state is returned, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls is finished.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S90639 and S90644, the number of prize balls is displayed by the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and in the second KT state by executing the process of step S90649. Although the case of displaying the number of prize balls according to the second KT pattern is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the award ball number display may not be displayed in the first KT state (the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

If the received effect control command is the special winning opening winning designation command (step S90650), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the special winning opening winning flag indicating that the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening has occurred ( Along with step S90651, 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning in the special winning opening) is added to the prize ball counter (step S90652).

If the received effect control command is the special prize winning award designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the special prize winning flag indicating that the winning of the game ball to the special prize opening 9024 has occurred. Along with (step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning in the special winning opening 9024) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90655).

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same when the game ball is won in the special winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 9024 is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when the game balls are won in the special winning opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when the game balls are entered in the special winning opening 9024. May be.

If the received production control command is the customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S90660), the production control CPU 90201 performs control to start the customer waiting demonstration display on the production display device 909 (step S90661). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous variable display was the small hit (step S90662), and the small hit continuously occurs. A small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of times of doing is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

Note that, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the small hits occur continuously, the continuous small hit effect can be executed, but the processes of steps S90662 and S90663 are executed. If the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that is a small hit is executed, the continuous small hit is performed even if the subsequently displayed variable display is a small hit. The effect is configured not to be executed.

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201, the received symbol designating command, the first empty empty start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S90665).

If the received effect control command is the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize designation command (step S90666), the effect control CPU 90101 receives the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored among the storage areas of the start-winning-time command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag or executes a process according to the received effect control command (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process processing (step S90706) shown in FIG. 109. In the background pattern process process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes a pending rendition control process for performing control related to the pending rendition (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any one of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

Background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied, and if the fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied, fluctuation is started in the background symbol display unit 909c. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background pattern is satisfied when it is confirmed by the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command is received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation start process (step S90901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the variation of the background symbol on the left middle right is started. Further, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the variation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

Background symbol changing process (step S90902): The end of the changing time of the background symbol is monitored. When the variable time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S90903). In the background symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the changing time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S90903): The control for finally stopping the fluctuation of the background symbol and displaying the stopped symbol is performed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit medium process (step S90908). In addition, when updating to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90904), the big hit display process (step S90904) on condition that the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit medium processing (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hit medium display processing (step S90908) is provided on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display processing (step S90904): Big hit display is controlled. Then, when a big winning opening opening display command (a big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the jackpot game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S90905).

Processing during round (step S90905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a special winning opening open display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed.

Post-round processing (step S90906): display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is open (closed) is received, interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): The big hit end display after the big hit game is finished is controlled. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) designating the end of the big hit is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900).

Processing during small hit (step S90908): Display control during small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value of the background symbol process flag to the value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the pending rendition effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when the big hit game is started, there is a hold memory that is a big hit among the hold memories that are currently stored, that is, a hold sequence that indicates that the big hit is continuously executed. The production can be executed.

In the suspension consecutive effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the big hit game start timing (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is a big hit display process (step S90904), it is determined that it is the start timing of the big hit game.

If it is the start timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 commands the start winning (that is, the symbol designating command and the valid starting winning designating command (the first valid starting winning designating command or the second valid). It is confirmed whether or not a command indicating a big hit is included in the set (start winning award designation command) (step S903502).

When the command indicating the big hit is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the big hit is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, the effect display device 909 displays the character string “Continuous jackpot confirmed”, so that there is a pending storage that is a jackpot among the currently stored pending memories, and the jackpot is continuous. Then, it is notified that it will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a pending storage that is a big hit among the currently stored first reserved memories related to the variable display of the first special symbol, or a second reserved related to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is configured to be able to notify that the big hit is continuously executed when there is a big hit pending storage among the memories. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and, for example, in the second hold storage, It is possible to notify that the big hit is continuously executed only when there is a big hit pending storage, and when there is a big hit pending storage in the first hold storage, the big hit continues. It may be configured so that the fact that it is executed is not notified. In addition, it may be possible to notify that the big hits are continuously executed only when there is a reserved storage that becomes a specific big hit (for example, 16R probability variation big hit).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the pending continuous execution flag indicating that the pending continuous effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N of step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is the time of the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either during-round processing (step S90905) or after-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that it is the timing during the big hit game.

If it is the timing during the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold consecutive execution flag is set (step S903505), and if not set, the process ends. If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not a new round is started in the big hit game (step S903506). For example, it can be confirmed by comparing the content of the received special winning opening display command and the content of the previously received special opening opening display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 increments the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds in the pending continuous effect by 1 and displays the effect based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 controls to display the number of rounds (steps S903507, S903508). Then, the process ends.

If it is not the timing of the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background pattern process flag is a big hit end effect process (step S90907), it is determined that it is the end timing of the big hit game.

If it is the end timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold consecutive execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the process is ended as it is. .. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the gaming state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game, a character display such as "probability change rush" is displayed on the effect display device 909, and when the KT state is controlled, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In, a character display such as "Small hit time rush" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 114, the gaming state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game, but, for example, at the start timing of the big hit game or the execution timing, the character display of “the second KT is present” or You may make it notify by displaying the character display of "no 2nd KT." Also in this case, the notification may not be performed when the holding continuous effect is executed, and the notification may be performed only when the holding continuous effect is not executed.

If the command indicating the big hit is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the hold consecutive execution flag if set (step S903512), and also resets the value of the total round number counter. (Step S903513).

As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, when the continuous holding production is executed by the processing of steps S903502 to S903503, at the start of the previous big hit game, the "continuous big hit confirmation" is displayed on the effect display device 909. By displaying the character display, it is notified that the big hits are continuously executed. Further, by the processing of steps S903504 to S903508, the number of rounds obtained by summing the number of rounds of the first big hit game and the number of rounds of the next big hit game are shown during execution of the pending consecutive effects, and a series of big hit games are executed. You can make it look like it is being done.

Further, by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, when the suspension consecutive production is not being executed, the gaming state (for example, the probability change state or the KT state) controlled after the end of the big hit game is informed, but the suspension consecutive production is executed. When it is in the middle, no notification is given. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the normal jackpot game is started after the jackpot game is finished, and it is possible to appear as if a series of jackpot games are being executed by the previous jackpot game and the subsequent jackpot game. ..

Also, as will be described later in detail, when the pending consecutive effects are being executed and the pending consecutive execution flag is set, after the end of the previous big hit game and before the start of the next big hit game, Even if a small hit occurs, execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, display of increased prize balls, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is over and the normal game is played, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the big hit game before and the big hit game after. it can.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out), only the left out pattern or the left and right background patterns in which the left, middle, and right background designs are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach patterns. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle and right sides are arranged in odd symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command and the display result 5 designation command are received (when it is determined to be 6R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle and right are arranged in even symbols To decide. Further, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the same combination as the out-of-reach pattern in which only the left and right background designs match To decide. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the variable display which is started this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S90618) indicating a small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether the display result 7 designation command is stored).

If the variable display to be started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold consecutive execution flag is set (step S90921b), and the flag is set. For example, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the process table for continuous holding is selected according to the variation pattern of the background pattern to be used (step S90921c). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932. The process table for continuous holding time selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the suspension consecutive production is being executed and the suspension consecutive execution flag is set, after the end of the previous big hit game, until the start of the subsequent big hit game, the small hit occurs. Even if it occurs, execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. In addition, in this embodiment, during execution of the suspension consecutive effect, the execution is restricted by prohibiting the execution of the effect related to the small hit, but, for example, it is inconspicuous (for example, the display size is small, the color is small). It may be limited by executing in a thin (for example, thin) mode.

If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the previous small hit flag has been set (step S90923). If the small hit flag is not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variable display executed last time is not the small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the small hits have continuously occurred. As the table for determining the presence and type of the continuous small hit production to be notified, the continuous small hit production determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the previous small hit flag has been set (that is, if the previously executed variable display result is a small hit and continuous small hits have occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 determines that As a table for determining the presence and type of continuous small hit production, a continuous small hit production determination table is selected according to the value of the continuous small hit counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits ( Step S90925).

In this embodiment, the process of step S90922 is executed so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be executable in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the continuous small hit production determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence and type of the continuous small hit production (step S90926).

FIG. 116 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the continuous small hit production determination table. Of these, FIG. 116(A) shows a specific example of the continuous small hit production determination table for the previous non-small hit, which is selected in step S90924. In addition, FIG. 116(B) shows that when the value of the continuous small hit number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit production determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, in the variable display which is started this time, 2 consecutively). The example of the continuous small hit production determination table (for two small continuous hits) selected when a small hit occurs is shown. Further, FIG. 116C shows that, in the continuous small hit production determination table selected in step S90925, the value of the continuous small hit number counter is 2 (that is, 3 consecutively in the variable display started this time). The specific example of the continuous small hit production determination table (for the continuous small hit number of 3 times) that is selected when a small small hit occurs is shown. Further, FIG. 116(D) shows that, in the continuous small hit production determination table selected in step S90925, when the value of the continuous small hit number counter is 3 or more (that is, continuously in the variable display started this time). The specific example of the continuous small hit production determination table (for the continuous small hit number of 4 times or more) to be selected when four or more small hits occur is shown.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the continuous small hit production determination table, determination values are assigned to continuous small hit production No, continuous small hit production A, continuous small hit production B, and continuous small hit production C, respectively. There is. In the present embodiment, the continuous small hit production A is, for example, a production in which a predetermined character A appears in the production display device 909 and a character display such as "again!" is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit production B is, for example, a production in which a predetermined character B appears on the production display device 909 and a character display such as "again!" is displayed as a dialogue of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit production C is, for example, a production in which a predetermined character C appears in the production display device 909 and a character display such as "again!" is displayed as a dialogue of the character C.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is changed according to the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the type of character display may be changed or the display color of the character display may be changed according to the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, an effect of lighting the decoration lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or an effect of outputting an effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed, and various continuous small hit effects may be performed. Different forms of production are possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case where three types of continuous small hit productions of continuous small hit productions A to C are configured to be executable is shown. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. In addition, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit production.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), when the previous variable display is not the small hit (that is, when the small hits do not occur continuously), there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, when the previous variable display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined as N in step S90923, it is not changed. You may comprise so that it may transfer to step S90931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit production determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116(B), when the small hit occurs continuously twice in the variable display this time, the continuous small hit effect is determined at a rate of 20% and is set at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit production A. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and the small continuous hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be determined at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116(C), when the small hits occur three times in succession in this variation display, it is determined that there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 30%. It is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, you may comprise not only the aspect shown by this Embodiment but the continuous small hit production C can be determined at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116(D), when the small hits occur four or more times in succession in the variable display this time, the continuous small hit effect is determined at a rate of 20% and the rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the continuous small hit production A is already executed in the second small hit variation continuously, so that FIG. 116(C), (D) As shown in, the execution ratio of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit variation of the third and subsequent times. Further, as shown in FIG. 116(C), since the proportion of the continuous small hit production B that has already been executed in the third consecutive small hit variation is high, as shown in FIG. In the small hit variation, the execution ratio of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case is configured in which the same kind of effect as the effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect is difficult to be executed by the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit is continuously displayed in the variable display thereafter, If the flag is set, it may be configured to be able to execute a continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variable display is a small hit (when a small hit occurs continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 116(B) to (D) is used. The case where the presence or absence and the type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variable display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116, the case of determining the type of the continuous small hit production to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit productions A to C by the lottery process is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the type of continuous small hit production may be fixedly determined according to the number of continuous small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in succession, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, and if it is the third small hit in succession, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined. If it is a win, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines and changes the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table corresponding to the continuous small hit production of the selected type is selected (step S90928). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932.

In this embodiment, the process of step S90932 and the process of background pattern changing during step S90944, which will be described later, are executed by using the process table selected in step S90928, so that the effect display device 909 continuously displays the background pattern while it is changing. The small hit production is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the small hit occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the ratio of the variable display of the shortened variation is increased (the present. In the example, as shown in FIG. 92(I) and FIG. 93, when a small hit occurs in the second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #27 of the shortening fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%). A variation display other than the variation may be displayed (in this example, the second variation pattern #28 having a relatively long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background pattern variation start process shown in FIG. 115, when the variation display this time is a small hit variation, it is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern of a shortened variation, and the variation of the shortened variation is determined. By executing the processing of steps S90922 to S90928 only when the pattern is a pattern and configuring the continuous small hit effect to be executable, when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always executed in the variable display of the shortening variation. To configure.

If the variation display to be started this time is not a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S90929) if set, and the small hit continuous number. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

After the small hit continuous number counter is cleared in step S90930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S90922), or if it is determined not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927). For, the effect control CPU 90201 selects the process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background pattern to be used, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S90931). Then, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Yes (step S90933). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the background pattern display unit 909c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070 in order to output sound from the speaker 9027.

When execution of continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns #26, #28, #29), step S90933 and the background described below are performed according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By continuing the process of step S90944 of the symbol changing process, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. If execution of the battle effect is designated in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns #16, #18, #19, #21, #23, #24, #29), steps S90928, S90931. According to the process table selected in step S9093 and the background symbol changing process in step S90944 described later, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer to start the background symbol variation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S90940), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S90944).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes a background symbol variation time extension process (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is started when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or the first when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the background symbol variation time extension process of step S90950, while performing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the symbol is started, the variable pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variable time is extended as necessary.

In step S90950, the effect control CPU 90201, for example, while performing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one deviating special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol which is a big hit is displayed. When it is started, a process of extending the variation time is performed while replacing the variation pattern of the background symbol with the special symbol of the one that is a big hit. Further, for example, while performing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, when the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of focus is started, Neither replacement of the variation pattern nor extension of the variation time is performed, and the variation display of the currently executed background pattern is executed as it is. Further, for example, while performing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, when the variable display of the other special symbol that is a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that started later is forcibly discontinued on the way, neither the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced nor the variation time is extended. The variable display of symbols is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S90970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, it moves to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare production has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process for displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without doing, it moves to step S90974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it moves to step S90983. In this embodiment, when the small hitting symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit game. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is set. The process moves to step S90983 without executing the displaying process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the stop symbol on the left middle right background symbol (stop symbol, jackpot symbol) which is being stopped and displayed on the effect display device 909. , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step S90971).

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y of step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag) are set (step S90974). .. When one of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S90976). Note that, in step S90976, the process table for continuous holding may be selected when the continuous holding execution flag is set. This process table for continuous holding is, for example, a fanfare production that emphasizes that a new jackpot game is started is not executed, a simple fanfare production is executed, or a jackpot game that replaces the fanfare production is executed. It is configured such that an effect or the like indicating that it is restarted is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a series of big hit games appear to be being executed by the first big hit game and the second big hit game.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as effect part, various lamps as effect part, and speaker 9027 as effect part) is executed (step S90978).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls to display the number of prize balls in the big hit pattern on the effect display device 909 (step S90979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the award ball number display by any of the patterns is not yet displayed, the control for newly starting the award ball number display by the big hit pattern is performed. Further, if the number of prize balls is already displayed according to the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, control for switching to the display of the number of prize balls according to the big hit pattern is performed.

In this embodiment, the background symbol variation stop processing shown in FIG. 118 shows the case of starting or switching the display of the number of prize balls by the big hit pattern (see step S90979), but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, in the big hit display process (step S90904) and the process during the first round after starting the big hit game (step S90905), the same process as in step S90979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the big hit pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background pattern process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y of step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects the process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step S90985). In step S90985, the process table for continuous holding may be selected when the continuous holding execution flag is set. This process table for continuous holding is configured such that, for example, a small hit mid-effect is not executed, a simple small hit mid-effect is executed, or an alternative to the small hit mid-effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the suspension consecutive production is being executed and the suspension consecutive execution flag is set, after the end of the previous big hit game, until the start of the subsequent big hit game, the small hit occurs. Even if it occurs, execution of effects related to the small hit will be restricted.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as effect parts, various lamps as effect parts, and speaker 9027 as effect parts) is executed (step S90987).

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the small hit medium processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the deviant symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972, and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900) (step S90989).

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a small hitting process (step S90908) in the background symbol process process. In the processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S909202). A process for controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data n (step S909203). That is, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S909205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step S909206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207. Move to. In step S909207, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the previous small hit flag if not set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S909208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variable display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). Therefore, when the small hit game is executed based on the first variable display which is a small hit after the variable display other than the small hit is executed, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, thereby The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if a small hit occurs again in the next variable display, it can be determined that the small hits have occurred twice consecutively based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when the small hit game is finished, step S909208 is executed to update the value of the small hit continuous number counter to 2, and when the small fluctuation is again made in the next variable display, the small hit continuous Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that a small hit has occurred three times in a row. After that, even if the small hits occur 4 times, 5 times, etc., by confirming the value of the small hit continuous number counter, the number of consecutive small hits can be determined. Can be judged.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900) (step S909209).

120 to 123 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display processing (step S90707). In the prize ball number display processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning in the big winning opening occurs), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S90501), and the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

If the first prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 90201 causes the effect display device 909 to play the prize ball at the first speed. The control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and starting the first prize ball increasing effect (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game and the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big winning opening is displayed. When a game ball wins the or special winning opening 9024, the prize ball increasing effect is executed such that the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls display is increased by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of award ball increase effects: a first award ball increase effect to a third award ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by one at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the number of prize balls is displayed in the big hit pattern during the big hit game. It is an effect that is executed in a manner that is performed. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to increase by 1. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is that when the number of prize balls display according to the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state, the number of prize balls is increased at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to increase by 1.

In this embodiment, the big winning opening prize flag is set (the winning of the big winning opening occurs) means that the big hit game is being displayed and the number of prize balls is displayed in the big hit pattern. Therefore, in step S90503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one at the first speed in the prize ball number display displayed in the big hit pattern is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning in the special winning opening has not occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the flag for executing the first prize sphere increasing effect is not set (that is, if the first prize sphere increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the first prize sphere increase effect executing flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize sphere increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the award in the number of prize balls. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been finished (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90507). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is not yet equal to the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again causes the effect display device 909 to play the prize ball at the first speed. Control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and for starting the first prize ball increasing effect (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( (Step S90509), the first prize ball increase effect is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number counter. However, as the processing of steps S90500 to S90509 is executed, the award ball number display is not immediately updated to the value obtained by adding 15 but the first speed (this example). Then, the number of prize balls is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 every 0.1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds×15=1.5 seconds to update all 15 prize balls for one prize winning in the special winning opening. The numerical display will be updated. In this case, a case may occur in which the next big winning opening is won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 award balls Even if the next big winning hole is won at the stage where the display of the number of prize balls is only displayed until then, the display of the mode in which the number of the next 6 prize balls is continuously increased is displayed. That is, the first prize ball increase production will be continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, the addition). The number of prize balls displayed will be updated in 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in (). However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By then, the production in which all the prize balls are increased is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning to the special winning opening 9024 has occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S90511), and the hold consecutive. It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process is ended as it is. That is, even if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the holding consecutive effects, the process is ended without performing the effects related to the small hit such as the award ball increasing effect and the winning effect. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the process moves to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the process is ended as it is. That is, even if the special winning opening 9024 rarely wins in the non-KT state, the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, and the process is terminated without performing the prize ball increasing effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed, which indicates that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the second prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 causes the effect display device 909 to perform the prize ball at the first speed. Control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and starting the second prize ball increasing effect (step S90515). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90516). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag has been set (during the first KT state) means that the number of prize balls display according to the first KT pattern is being displayed. Therefore, in step S90515, the first KT pattern is displayed. In the displayed prize ball number display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 second in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning in the special winning opening 9024 has not occurred), the third winning ball increasing effect execution indicating that the third winning ball increasing effect is being executed It is confirmed whether or not the medium flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize sphere increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize sphere increasing effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize sphere increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize sphere increasing effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize sphere increasing effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S90518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the flow shifts to step S90540.

If the second prize sphere increase effect executing flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize sphere increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the award in the number of prize balls. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90520). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is not yet equal to the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again causes the effect display device 909 to play the prize ball at the first speed. Control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and starting the second prize ball increasing effect (step S90521). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( (Step S90522), the second prize ball increase effect is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when the special winning port 9024 wins in the small hit game that occurs during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), the prize ball number display may not be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processes of steps S90510 to S90522. Instead, the prize ball count display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball count increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 second in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, with respect to one winning in the special winning opening 9024, it takes 0.1 seconds×15=1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a period of seconds. In this case, it is possible that the next special winning opening 9024 will be won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls. For example, 5 out of 15 award balls Even if the next special winning opening 9024 is won at the stage where the number of prize balls is increased only up to the eye, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of additionally generated prize balls). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is finished. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of all prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect effect (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the prize effect executing flag indicating that the prize effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the prize effect executing flag is set (that is, if the prize effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the prize effect standby number counter for counting the number of waiting prize effects. One is added (step S90525). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

If the prize effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the prize effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays an increase in award balls on the effect display device 909 (for example, character display such as “+15”). Is displayed (step S90526), and at the same time, the effect display device 909 is controlled to start the winning effect (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the prize effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the third prize sphere increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize sphere increasing effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize sphere increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize sphere increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

If the third prize sphere increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize sphere increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the number of prize balls being displayed (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 starts control for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed on the effect display device 909, and performs control for starting the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90532). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In the present embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag has been set (during the second KT state) means that the number of prize balls display based on the second KT pattern is being displayed. Therefore, in step S90531, the second KT pattern is displayed. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize-ball increasing effect in which the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize sphere increase effect executing flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize sphere increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is set, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the effect effect (step S90534).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the number of prize balls display (that is, whether 0.5 seconds has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of prize balls by 1). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again causes the effect display device 909 to play the prize ball at the second speed. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control for starting the third prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S90537). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control for ending the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is performed (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90539), and finishes the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when the special winning opening 9024 is won in the small hit game that occurs during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, S90535 to S90359. The value is not updated to the specified value, but the effect production is executed and the prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed, and the prize ball number is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds×15=7.5 until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed for one winning in the special winning opening 9024. The prize ball number display will be updated over a period of seconds. In this case, it is conceivable that the next special winning port 9024 will be won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 award balls Even when the next special winning opening 9024 is won at a stage where the number of prize balls is increased only up to the eye, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of additionally generated prize balls).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. The production in which all the prize balls increase may not be completed by the time. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed. Regardless of whether or not the timer is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the third winning ball increase effect is not finished during the small hit game, the third prize is displayed over the variation display after the end of the small hit game. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (further, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display interposed therebetween).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the prize effect executing flag is set (step S90540). If the prize effect executing flag is set (that is, if the prize effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the prize effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is set, for example, when a winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the timing to end the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to end the winning effect on the effect display device 909 (step S90542).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect standby number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to display an award ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 909 (step S90545), and starts winning effect on the effect display device 909. Control is performed (step S90546).

When the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, when there is no waiting winning effect that has not been executed), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

In this embodiment, when the process of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547 is executed, and if a special winning port 9024 is won in the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, the winning effect is executed. In this case, there is a possibility that a new prize will be generated at the next special winning opening 9024 during execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the player waits until the winning effect being executed is completed, After the winning award effect being executed is finished, the next prize ball increase display and the prize effect are executed (the award ball increase display and the prize effect are delayed and executed).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the winning effect are displayed before the small hit game is finished. In some cases, it cannot be executed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed. Regardless of whether it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the display of the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not finished during the small hit game, it will change over the variable display after the small hit game is finished. The display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect are executed (further, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games across the variable display).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 9024 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 9024 is won. (See steps S90523, S90533, S90534).

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize sphere number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the background symbol process process, The prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be configured to be executed before the processing of S90900 to S90908 is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display of the award ball increase display and the winning effect are executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 9024 is shown, but, for example, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is further provided. The display may be turned on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a case in which the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening or the special winning opening 9024, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured so as to have a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which a variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls are paid out) In the above, the prize ball increasing effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 even when the winning in the general winning opening occurs. In this case, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, an effect in which the number of award balls is increased by one at a first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) is uniformly performed in the award ball increasing effect. In the second KT state, the number of prize balls is increased by one at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increasing effect even when a prize is won in the general winning opening. You may carry out the production. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the first KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state), even if a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect is produced. May be configured not to be executed.

Next, a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification. Further, FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the limitation of the KT notification and the small hit notification. In addition, in FIGS. 124 and 125, the modes of the effect screen are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

FIG. 124 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the holding continuous effect is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 124(A), during the big hit game, for example, a character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" is displayed as a line of the character 90301.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), when the jackpot game is over, a character display 90312 such as the line "small hit time rush" of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification for notifying that the second KT state is controlled. (See step S903511).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 124(C) and (D), in the effect display device 909, the variable display of the background symbol on the left middle right is started, and when the small hit symbol “135” is derived and displayed, the small hit symbol is displayed. As the notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurs!" is displayed. Also, the number of prize balls display 90305 based on the second KT pattern is displayed.

FIG. 125 shows a specific example in which the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted when the continuous holding effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 125(A), during the first big hit game, for example, a character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" is displayed as a line of the character 90301. To be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), even when the big hit game is over, the KT notification is not performed because the holding continuous effect is being executed (that is, the character display 90312 such as "small hit time rush" is displayed. (See steps S903509 to S903510), the character 90301 and the character display 90302 are continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), the small hit symbol “135” is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display after the first big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not issued. (That is, the character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurs!" is not displayed). At the same time, the display of the award increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and execution of effects related to the small hit is limited. In the example shown in FIG. 125(C), the number of rounds (“round 16” in this example) is continuously displayed from the time of the final round of the first big hit game, and the dialogue of the character 90301 “is still! A character display 90313 such as “” is displayed, which makes it appear that the big hit game is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), when the second big-hit game is started, for example, a character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character such as "Big hitting!" is displayed as a line of the character 90301. A display 90302 is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 125(D), a round number display (“round 17” in this example) in which the number of rounds of the first big hit game is added to the number of rounds of the second big hit game is displayed. , It seems that a series of big hit games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 125, a predetermined story such as a story is sequentially developed through the previous big hit game period, the variable display period after the big hit game ends, and the subsequent big hit game period. It may be executed or a specific movie image (for example, an image such as a moving image in which a character moves based on a specific story) may be displayed so that a series of jackpot games are executed. ..

Next, the relationship between the contents of the reserved storage and the limit of the KT notification and the small hit notification will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the content of the reserved storage and the limitation of the KT notification and the small hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 126(A), when the big hit game is started, if there is a pending storage 4 that is a big hit among the currently stored pending memories 1 to 4, the big hit is continuously executed. A notification of the holding party is made to notify that. In this case, KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the jackpot game is over. Also, even if a small hit occurs based on the pending 1-3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, the display of the award increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and execution of effects related to the small hit is limited.

When it is notified that a big hit occurs a plurality of times in a short period of time by holding continuous production, at the same time, it is also notified that the period of controlling the KT state (particularly the second KT state) after the big hit game is short, and rather There is a risk that the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hits will be continuously executed by the holding continuous effect, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not made after the end of the big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs. By limiting not to perform small hit notification (and display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit related effects, etc.), you can feel as if a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is possible to prevent the interest from being deteriorated by the suspended production.

In this embodiment, regardless of the big hit type of the first big hit or the big hit after, when the big hit game is started, it is possible to execute the hold consecutive effect if there is a hold memory that is a big hit. For example, the jackpot type of the subsequent jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability jackpot (that is, 2R regular jackpot not controlled in the second KT state, 2R probability jackpot, 6R regular jackpot and 6R jackpot jackpot), and the jackpot of the preceding jackpot. If the type corresponds to the 16R probability variation big hit (that is, the big hit controlled to the second KT state), or if both of them correspond, it is notified that the second KT state is a short period. Therefore, the execution of the suspended consecutive effects may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency may be reduced). Further, for example, in the case where the structure is always controlled to the KT state (or the second KT state) after the big hit game, the held consecutive effects may be executable.

Further, by limiting the situation in which the held consecutive effects can be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 126(B), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R sure variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal that is not controlled to the second KT state). Big hit, 2R sure change big hit, 6R normal big hit and 6R sure change big hit), and when the big hit type of the later big hit is 16R sure change big hit (that is, big hit controlled to the 2nd KT state), the continuous performance is executed. It may be possible. In this case, after the previous big hit game is finished, it is desirable that the next big hit is not controlled in the second KT state and the next big hit occurs sooner, so that there is no possibility of deteriorating the interest by the holding continuous production. .. Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of this big hit game. In the example shown in FIG. 126(B), the jackpot type of the subsequent jackpot is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled to the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot after the jackpot, If the jackpot type of the above jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 2R regular jackpot not controlled in the second KT state, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R regular jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot), it is possible to execute a suspended continuous production You may do so. Even in this case, it is desirable that the next big hit occurs early, so that the interest will not be lowered on the contrary by the holding continuous production.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 126(C), when the jackpot types of the first jackpot and the later jackpot are both 16R probability variation jackpots (that is, jackpots controlled to the second KT state), the jackpot game starts. When (or during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game), after notifying that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game this time, a suspension sequence for notifying that the big hit is continuously executed May be notified. In this case, even if a small hit occurs based on the pending 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the display of the award ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit related effects such as the small hit) is performed. Restrict not to be discouraged. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized in the same situation as in the case of FIG. 126(B) described above and deteriorating the interest of the player due to the held continuous production.

In addition, when performing the suspension continuous production, control is not performed to make it appear as if a series of big hit games are being executed, and a normal game is performed between the previous big hit game and the following big hit game. May be.

127, in the example shown in FIGS. 126(B) and (C), a modified example of the pending consecutive production control process in the case where a normal game is performed between the first big hit game and the second big hit game. It is a flowchart showing.

In the hold consecutive effect control process shown in FIG. 127, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the big hit game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is a big hit display process (step S90904), it is determined that it is the start timing of the big hit game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 commands the start winning a prize (that is, the symbol designating command and the valid starting winning designating command (the first valid starting winning designating command or the second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the set of (starting winning designation command) includes a command indicating a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled to the second KT state) (step S903510).

When the command indicating the 16R probability variation big hit is not included (N in step S903510), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to control the second KT state after the big hit game of this time according to the big hit type of this time. Is notified (step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is informed by displaying a character display of “with second KT” or a character display of “without second KT”. After that, if the hold continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the processing is ended.

If the command indicating the 16R certainty variation jackpot is included (Y in step S903510), the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the current jackpot is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled to the second KT state). After the big hit game of, it notifies that it is not controlled to the second KT state (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is informed by displaying a character display of "no second KT".

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the big hit exists in the pending storage and that the big hit is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, on the effect display device 909, the character display of “Continuous jackpot confirmation” is displayed to notify that the jackpots are continuously executed. After that, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the holding consecutive execution flag indicating that the holding consecutive effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the processing.

By executing the processes of steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, the jackpot is controlled to be a jackpot other than the 16R sure-variable jackpot (that is, a 2R regular jackpot, a 2R sure-variable jackpot, a 6R regular jackpot, and a 6R sure-variable jackpot that are not controlled to the second KT state). At this time, if there is a pending storage that is a 16R sure-change big hit (that is, a big hit controlled to the second KT state), a hold consecutive effect can be executed. Further, by performing the processing of steps S903510, S903511, S903512, and S903513, when the 16R probability variation big hit (that is, the big hit controlled to the second KT state) is controlled, the 16R probability variation big hit (that is, the second KT state). If there is a pending storage that is a big hit controlled by (1), it is possible to execute the hold continuous effect after informing that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. In addition, in the example of FIG. 127, the pending consecutive production is executed after informing that the big hit to be controlled this time is the big hit not controlled in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the pending consecutive presentation is not limited thereto. After executing (i.e., after notifying that the big hits are continuously executed), it may be notified that the big hit to be controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state.

Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production in this embodiment will be described. 128 to 131 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode of the prize sphere increasing effect. Of these, FIG. 128 shows a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 129 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIG. 130 and FIG. 131 show a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increasing production executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 128 to 131, the aspect of the effect screen is changed in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

First, with reference to FIG. 128, a specific example of the effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of the winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 128(A), when the big hit game is being played, the effect display device 909 displays the number of prize balls 90300 according to the big hit pattern (see step S90979) and, for example, the character 90301. A case where a character display 90302 such as “Big hit in!” is displayed as a line of the character 90301 is shown. Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, as the award ball number display 90300 in the jackpot pattern, a case is shown in which the award ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is won at the special winning opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 128(B), an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed on the effect display device 909, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 second in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 128(C). As described above, when the updating of all the prize ball number displays is finished, the first prize ball increasing effect is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 129(A), in the first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the award ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. In the case where "" has occurred, a case where a character display 304 such as "Small hit occurrence!" is displayed is shown. Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, as the award ball number display 90303 based on the first KT pattern, a case is shown in which the award ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a special winning opening 9024 is won during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 129(B), in the effect display device 909, an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed, and a second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In the present embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 second in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 129(C). As described above, when the updating of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increasing effect is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning at the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 130(A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the award ball number display 90305 based on the second KT pattern (see step S90649) and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a case where a character display 90306 such as “small hit occurrence!” is displayed is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, as the prize sphere number display 90305 based on the second KT pattern, the prize sphere number display 90305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a special winning opening 9024 is won during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 130(B), effect production is started on the production display device 909 (see step S90523), and enlarged display of the prize ball count display 90305 is also started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 130(B), a case where a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, a glittering image) is displayed around the award ball number display 90305 is shown as the effect effect. .. Further, when a special winning opening 9024 is won, as shown in FIG. 130(B), an award ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526) and the winning effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 130(B), a case where a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 90309 such as "+15" is displayed as an award ball increase display is shown. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130(C), the effect display device 909 starts the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). -S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130(C) to FIG. 131(H), in the third award ball increasing effect, the second award ball increasing effect is compared with the second award ball increasing effect. The number of prize balls is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), it is assumed that the effect effect has ended (the winning effect has continued), and that a new winning a prize to the next special winning opening 9024 has occurred during the execution of the winning effect. And In this case, as shown in FIG. 131(E), the effect effect is started on the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the display of the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not executed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(F), it is assumed that the effect effect has ended, and further, as shown in FIG. 131(G), the winning effect has ended. Then, when the winning effect is finished, based on the fact that there is an unexecuted winning effect that is not yet executed, as shown in FIG. 131(H), the award ball increase display is delayed (see step S90526) and the winning operation is performed. The effect is started (see step S90527).

Then, after that, until the display of all the prize balls is updated, including the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special winning opening 9024 additionally generated in FIG. 131(E), the second prize ball increase production is performed. To be executed.

Note that, in the examples shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, a case where an effect image 90307 in a glittering form is displayed around the award ball count display 90305 is shown as the effect effect, but it is limited to such a form. Absent. For example, as the effect effect, an effect that acts on the prize ball number display 90305 in some form may be executed, such as displaying an image that covers the prize ball number display 90305. By acting on the award ball number display 90305 in this way, an effect may be executed such that the award ball number display 90305 is difficult to visually recognize.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls is shown. However, the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game and the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state may be separately displayed. For example, in the case of a big hit game, the number of prize balls won in the big hit game is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the form shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, or the second KT is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the mode shown in FIG. 130(A). The number of award balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of award balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state is once ended and the big hit game is started, the display of the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state is erased, and the number of prize balls displayed during the big hit game is displayed. It is possible to display the total number of prize balls acquired in the KT state until the KT state is ended and the non-KT state is entered. You may comprise. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by being able to recognize the number of won prize balls only during the KT state.

Next, the effect timing of effect in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 132 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the small hitting game in the second KT state, when the first winning occurs when the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is started (step S90530). Update reference display of the number of prize balls for the first winning is started to start the third prize ball increasing effect (see steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and effect effect is executed (step). (See S90523). Also, as shown in FIG. 132, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 132, in the small hitting game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increasing effect and the prize effect are being executed, the second prize is won. The base effect effect is immediately executed, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed by inheriting the number of prize balls increased by the second winning. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 132, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second winning occurs, the winning effect for the second winning is not immediately executed, and as shown in FIG. Then, after finishing the winning effect for the first winning, the winning effect for the second winning is executed with a delay.

Then, after that, even after the special winning opening 9024 (special variable winning ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is finished, all the prize ball number displays are updated in the third winning ball increasing effect. If it is not over or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 132, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the variation display after the small hit game is finished, and also in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increasing effect and the winning effect.

Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In addition, in FIG. 133, for example, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). When it comes to the start timing of the variable display that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the variable display of the background symbol on the left middle right is started. In this case, the presence or absence and the type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit production A, at the execution timing of the continuous small hit production during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 133(B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. With the appearance of A90310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode in which a character display 90311 such as "again!" is displayed as a line of the character A90310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit production B, at the execution timing of the continuous small hit production during the variable display, as shown in FIG. Character B90312 appears, and the continuous small hit effect B is executed in a mode in which a character display 90311 such as "again!" is displayed as a line of the character B90312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit production C, at the execution timing of the continuous small hit production during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 133(B-3), the predetermined display is made in the effect display device 909. Character C90313 appears, and the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a mode in which a character display 90311 such as "again!" is displayed as a line of the character C90313.

Next, the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 134 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 134(A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if a small hit does not occur continuously in a plurality of variable displays (before and after the variable display indicating a small hit). When the small hit occurs only once, such as when the variable display is a variable display, the continuous small hit effect is configured to be unexecutable (see steps S90929 and S90930).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(B), when a small hit occurs continuously in a plurality of variable displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent variable displays in which the small hit occurs continuously. Execution is possible (see steps S90921a to S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134(B), the presence or absence and the type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which the small hits occur continuously are started (step (See S90926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134(B), there is shown a case in which the continuous small hit production can be executed during the variable display in which the small hit occurs, but only in such a mode. Instead, the continuous small hit production may be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variable display in which the small hit occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the presence or absence and the type of the continuous small hit production are determined at the start of the variable display when the small hits occur continuously is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. .. For example, the effect control microphone computer 90200, when a small hit occurs, at the timing of starting the small hit game (for example, after determining Y in step S90983 of the background symbol variation stop processing shown in FIG. 118). Based on the winning determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the variation display to be started next is also a small hit, and the variation display to be started next is also small. If it is a win, the same processing as steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence and type of the continuous small hit effect. When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

Further, for example, the effect control microphone computer 90200, when a small hit occurs, a timing during which the small hit game is started and a predetermined time has elapsed since the small hit game was started (for example, during the small hit game. At any timing, such as the timing when the winning a prize is generated during the small hit game, or the timing during the small hit game), based on the prefetch determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, the next start is started. It is determined whether or not the variable display is also a small hit, and if the variable display to be started next is also a small hit, according to the same processing as step S90926 shown in this embodiment, The presence or absence and the type of continuous small hit production may be determined. When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect may be executed over the period from the timing in the middle of the small hit game to the next variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the dish from which the game balls are dispensed (the hit ball supply dish 903 or the surplus ball receiving dish 904) becomes full, a full tank notification may be executed. For example, when the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiving plate 904 can be detected by a detection unit such as a sensor, and when the detection unit detects that the storage amount is a predetermined amount or more, the effect is produced. The display device 909 displays a character "full tank error" or outputs an error sound to perform full tank notification. Here, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot gaming state and the second KT state, the prize balls are paid out more frequently, but in the second KT state, since the jackpot gaming state is not paid out in a large amount at a time, It is easy to eliminate the full tank condition. Therefore, the execution mode of the full tank notification may be different between the big hit game state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a conservative manner (for example, the character size of “full tank error” is small, the error volume is small, etc.) compared to the big hit game state, In the big hit game state, when the storage amount exceeds a first predetermined amount, full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the storage amount exceeds a second predetermined amount which is larger than the first predetermined amount, a full tank notification is given. It may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015) capable of changing between the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. And special variable winning ball device 9022), and a special state control means that is in a state different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) that includes the variable winning means changing to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is controlled to a special state more frequently than the normal state. Then, the variable winning means is provided so as not to win the game medium ejected toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to the special state (for example, delaying the flow of the game ball. This is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). In addition, the variable display that does not trigger the advantageous state control in the special state includes a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variation pattern #25, #27 of shortened variation), The variable display period can be executed with the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern #26, #28 including the continuous effect), which is the second period longer than the first period. Then, in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the proportion determined by the second variation pattern #28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 93). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest from being deteriorated and to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled to the special state, related effects related to the special state (for example, a small hit notification, a continuous small hit effect, a display of increased prize balls, a winning effect such as a small hit) Related production execution means capable of executing a production related to (1) and a hold related to a variable display that triggers the advantageous state to be controlled in the holding information stored by the holding storage means when the advantageous state is controlled. When the suggestive effect execution means capable of executing the suggestive effect (for example, the holding continuous effect) suggesting that the information is included, and the suggestive effect executing means, the preceding advantageous state and the subsequent When it is controlled to a special state between the advantageous state, limiting means for limiting the execution of the related effect (for example, during the execution of the pending continuous effect, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, display of prize ball increase display, Execution of effects related to small hits such as winning effects is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, the suggestion effect executing means is a variable that triggers to be controlled to the first advantageous state in the holding information stored by the holding storage means. The suggestion effect can be executed when the hold information regarding the display is included (for example, refer to FIG. 126(B)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first advantageous state is controlled, among the pending information stored by the pending storage means, the pending information regarding the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state is included. In such a case, the suggestive effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (for example, refer to FIG. 126(C)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled, a promotion notification means (for example, a performance display) capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, a right-handed notification) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the predetermined route. Device 909, which is realized by displaying a character display of "right hitting", an arrow display indicating the right direction, and the like), and the promotion notifying unit is provided when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. , The variable notification may be performed in a different manner when the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern (for example, in the KT state, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, a variation pattern). , The second variation pattern #26, #28) is performing the variable display more than the variation display of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern #25, #27). , "Right stroke" character display, arrow display indicating the right direction, etc. may be reduced or made transparent to prevent the right stroke. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, a storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hitting ball supply tray 903 and an extra ball receiving tray 904) and a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. Tank notification means (e.g., realized by displaying a character "full tank error" on the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound), the full tank notification means is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when it is being controlled and when it is controlled to a special state (for example, in the second KT state, it is conservative as compared to the jackpot gaming state). The full tank notification may be executed in a different mode (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), and in the jackpot gaming state, when the storage amount exceeds the first predetermined amount. The full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed when the storage amount exceeds the second predetermined amount which is larger than the first predetermined amount.). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result (the big hit symbol in this example), the advantageous state is higher for the player than the special state (the big hit game in the present example). The state) can be controlled, and when the display result of the variable display becomes the special result (in this example, the small hit pattern), the special state can be controlled. Further, in the special state, the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently executed, 2 There may be a small hit only when the variable display of special symbols is executed). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state and improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, "high degree of advantage" means, for example, when the state is controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit game state in this example) or a special state (a small hit game state in this example). It means that there is a high degree of expectation that game media will be obtained once. For example, because the variable winning ball device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 9020, the special variable winning ball device 9022) has a long opening time or a large number of times of opening, many prizes can be obtained, By having a large number of prize balls, it is possible to obtain many game values such as obtaining a large number of balls.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (small hitting game state in this example) that is advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the special condition is met (in this example, a big hit). Then, it is possible to control to a special state (KT state (first KT state, second KT state) in this example) in which the frequency of control to the special state is higher than that before the special condition is satisfied. Also, in the special state, when the next variable display is executed after being controlled to the special state, and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (in this example, the continuous small hit effect) is executed. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the count display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined trigger (in this example, the game ball is won in the special winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). It is possible, and a first display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by a big hit pattern), and a second display mode that is more emphasized than the first display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by the second KT pattern). ), the count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 128, in the big hit pattern in the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 909, As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the award ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed near the center of the effect display device 909, and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated). Therefore, by providing a plurality of display modes for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the count display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is displayed as the count display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when some kind of gauge display or countdown display is performed in the presentation as the count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined occasion is that the game ball has won the big winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, a level of some gauge display. The condition for up may be satisfied. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, a predetermined trigger may be generated based on the occurrence of a small winning combination or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of prize balls is added and displayed as the update display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when some count display is subtracted and displayed, You may comprise so that the structure shown by the form may be applied.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90200 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change pattern such as the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-relation, when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) and a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. , A:B=100%:0%, and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a case is shown in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols of “1” to “9”, background symbols (effect symbols), and normal symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally displayed and displayed. It may be one.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 9027, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as two effect control boards.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but the game control microcomputer 90560 may be provided on another board (for example, as shown in FIG. Audio output board 9070 and lamp driver board 9035 shown in 82, or a sound/lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the audio output board 9070 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 in the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may simply be passed on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the sound output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. Microcomputer 90200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 909 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in accordance with the above, and changing the received command as it is or by changing it to, for example, a simplified command. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above-described embodiments, similarly to the sound output board 9070 and the lamp. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the driver board 9035 or the sound/lamp board.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but in the present invention, a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player when the symbol is rotated and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do so.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which a game medium is used as a game machine has been taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that dispenses a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit as a type of big hit, and based on the fact that it was determined as a probability variation big hit as a type of big hit, a gaming machine controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game was shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above-described embodiments to a gaming machine that is controlled to the probability changing state after the end.

1A, 1B Pachinko gaming machine 2 Gaming board 3 Gaming machine frame 5, 5X, 5Y, 5Z Performance display device 12 Performance control board 35A Stick origin position sensor 35B Push sensor 35C Vibration motor 36A Button sensor 37A Rocket origin position sensor 37C Rocket motor 38A to 38D Cross button sensor 39A Cover body origin position sensor 50 Opening/closing frame 55 Setting changeover switch 120 CPU for effect control
901 Pachinko gaming machine 908a First special symbol display device 908b Second special symbol display device 909 Production display device 909a First variable display portion 909b Second variable display portion 909c Background symbol display portion 9013 First start winning opening 9013a First start opening Switch 9014 Second start winning opening 9014a Second starting opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Actuating gate 9017a Operating gate switch 9018c Design holding memory display unit 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom member 9024 Special winning opening 9023a 1st count switch 9025a 2nd count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 Performance control board 90200 Performance control microcomputer 90201 Performance control CPU
90560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a first mechanism and a second mechanism capable of attaching and detaching the first mechanism,
The first mechanism body has a control means capable of controlling the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body, and is attachable to and detachable from a plurality of types of second mechanism bodies including a specific second mechanism body,
The second mechanism is
A plurality of detection means for detecting the state of the second mechanism ,
A movable body that can move,
Drive means for driving the movable body,
A plurality of detecting means for detecting the state of the operating means and the movable body ,
It is possible to output detection specifying information capable of specifying the detection state of each detecting means to the control means,
The control means is capable of controlling the drive of the movable body by the drive means, and based on the detection specific information output from the second mechanism, the specific first unit to which the first mechanism is mounted is attached. It is determined whether or not it is a two-mechanism body, and when it is determined that it is the specific second mechanism body, a notification is given,
further,
Variable winning means capable of changing the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult
A special state control means which is a state different from the advantageous state and which can be controlled to a special state that includes the variable winning means changing to the first state;
Compared to the normal state and a special state control means capable of controlling the high frequency special condition to be controlled in the special state,
The variable winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the variable state is controlled to the special state.
The variable display that does not trigger the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period and the second variable period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. Can be executed with the second variable display pattern,
In the special state, the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is performed by the first variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being lower than the percentage.